06.03.2013 Views

User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide

User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide

User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series<br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>)<br />

This PDF file is best viewed using Acrobat ® Reader 5


Using the printer to print copies of bank notes or securities is illegal and punishable, regardless of whether they<br />

are being used.<br />

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Microsoft Network are trademarks or registered trademarks of<br />

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.<br />

Novell, NetWare, IntranetWare, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States. and other<br />

countries.<br />

Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, Postscript 3, and the PostScript logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.<br />

Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS, TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple<br />

Computer, Inc.<br />

Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.<br />

UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open<br />

Company Ltd.<br />

Solaris, Sun OS, and NIS (Network Information Services) are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun<br />

Microsystems Inc. in the United States.<br />

HP, HPGL, HPGL/2 and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Japan Hewlett Packard Company.<br />

All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.<br />

Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.<br />

Our printer software uses some of the codes created by the Independent JPEG Group.<br />

Saved data may be lost if hard disk of the machine breaks down due to external shocks or if the power is<br />

accidentally cut off in a manner not following the methods listed in manuals or other documentations. <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong><br />

is not responsible for such data loss and any consequence caused by such data loss.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus.<br />

Important<br />

1 This guide is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this guide may not be copied in<br />

whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.<br />

2 Parts of this guide are subjected to change without prior notice.<br />

3 We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions or missing pages.<br />

4<br />

Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this guide. Unauthorized<br />

operation can cause faults or accidents. <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized<br />

operation of the equipment.<br />

<strong>Xerox</strong>, The Document Company and Ethernet are registered trademarks.<br />

DocuWorks and CentreWare are trademarks.


Preface<br />

Thank you for purchasing the <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series.<br />

Written with the new user in mind, this <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) provides all the necessary<br />

information and precautions on operating the printer/scanner functions as well as using<br />

this machine as a network printer.<br />

To get the most out of this machine, please read this guide before using it. This guide is written<br />

with the assumption that you are familiar with the basic knowledge and way of operating<br />

your computer and the network environment. After reading it keep this guide handy as a reference<br />

for problems which you might encounter when using this machine.<br />

For more information on using this machine and the copier features, see the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) and for information on fax features, see the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile).<br />

In this guide, DocumentCentre C400/320/240 may be referred to as the DocumentCentre<br />

C400/320/240 series.<br />

In this guide, precautions are indicated with the symbol . Always read and follow these instructions<br />

before carrying out the required procedure. Also, thoroughly read the Safety Notes provided in this<br />

guide.<br />

As a member of the International Star Program, <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> certifies that this product satisfies<br />

the Japanese requirements for International Star Program standards.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> shares the global concern about environmental conservation and has integrated that concern<br />

in its business activities from research and development to disposal. We have implemented a<br />

number of programs to lessen the burden on the environment through totally eliminating ozone-depleting<br />

chlorofluorocarbons from our manufacturing facilities.<br />

We are committed to leadership in the conservation of resources by reusing and recycling post-consumer<br />

waste material such as paper, consumables such as cartridges and parts from copiers and printers<br />

of our customers.<br />

Along with our efforts to make environmental values a part of the <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> culture, DocumentCentre<br />

C400/320/240 adopts recycled components that satisfy our strict quality standards.<br />

About reception interference<br />

If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be<br />

causing radio interference. Switch it off immediately. If this interference disappears, the machine is the<br />

cause of the interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.<br />

● Reposition or re-orient the machine and the TV and/or radio.<br />

● Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.<br />

● Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets that operate on different circuits.<br />

● Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. (For an outdoor<br />

antenna, ask your local electrician for support.)<br />

● Use coaxial cable antennas.<br />

This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825. This means that the machine<br />

does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined<br />

within the protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the<br />

machine during any phase of user operation.<br />

This equipment complies with the guidelines set forth by the Japan Business Machine Makers<br />

Association on the harmonic affects by copiers and other reproduction devices in accordance with<br />

the guidelines on the harmonic suppressors of electronic appliances and general-purpose<br />

machines.<br />

i


ii<br />

Contents<br />

◆ Preface ...................................................................................................................................i<br />

◆ Contents ................................................................................................................................ii<br />

◆ Related <strong>Guide</strong>s .................................................................................................................. viii<br />

◆ Using This <strong>Guide</strong> ..................................................................................................................ix<br />

◆ Safety Notes ........................................................................................................................ xii<br />

Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments ............................................................................................. 4<br />

1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong>....................................................................................... 4<br />

1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong> .................................................................................. 5<br />

1.2 Connecting Interface Cable ................................................................................. 10<br />

1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface ........................................................... 10<br />

1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface.......................................................... 11<br />

1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface ..................................................... 11<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address............................................................................................... 13<br />

1.3.1 Setting IP Address ................................................................................ 14<br />

1.4 Setting Port.......................................................................................................... 18<br />

1.4.1 Activating Port ....................................................................................... 18<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation ............................................................................................... 22<br />

Chapter 2 Setting up Network<br />

2.1 Windows Network (SMB)..................................................................................... 26<br />

2.1.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 26<br />

2.1.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 27<br />

2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)....................................................................................................... 28<br />

2.2.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 28<br />

2.2.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 29<br />

2.3 Using Internet Printing ......................................................................................... 30<br />

2.3.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 30<br />

2.3.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 31<br />

2.4 NetWare............................................................................................................... 32<br />

2.4.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 32<br />

2.4.2 Interface ................................................................................................ 32<br />

2.4.3 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 33


Chapter 3 Basic Printing<br />

3.1 Flow of Printing (Windows) .................................................................................. 36<br />

3.2 About Paper......................................................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.1 Difference From Copying....................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.2 Caution for Printing ............................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.3 Paper Supply......................................................................................... 38<br />

3.2.4 Outputting Paper ................................................................................... 39<br />

3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4................................................................ 39<br />

3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray).................................................. 40<br />

3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray ...................................................... 45<br />

3.3 Printing Features ................................................................................................. 46<br />

3.3.1 Before Printing ...................................................................................... 46<br />

3.3.2 Printing Procedure ................................................................................ 46<br />

3.3.3 Setting Printing Features....................................................................... 47<br />

3.3.4 Using On-line Help ................................................................................ 49<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ............................................................. 50<br />

3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>................................................................................. 50<br />

3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................................ 53<br />

3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers.............................................................. 54<br />

3.5 Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line ..................................................................................... 56<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status.............................................................. 57<br />

3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer ....................................................... 57<br />

3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................ 58<br />

3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction ............................................... 60<br />

Chapter 4 Special Printing<br />

4.1 Printing Special Papers ....................................................................................... 64<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size....................................................................... 66<br />

4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size................................................. 66<br />

4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size ........................................................ 68<br />

4.3 Secure Print......................................................................................................... 70<br />

4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs...................................................................... 70<br />

4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs..................................................................... 72<br />

4.4 Sample Print ........................................................................................................ 77<br />

4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs..................................................................... 77<br />

4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs.................................................................... 78<br />

4.5 Delayed Print ....................................................................................................... 83<br />

iii


iv<br />

4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs.................................................................... 83<br />

4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs................................................................... 85<br />

4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing ...................................................................... 89<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing ..................................................................................................... 91<br />

4.7.1 System Environment ............................................................................. 91<br />

4.7.2 Sending E-mail...................................................................................... 95<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail ..................................................................................... 97<br />

4.8.1 System Environment ............................................................................. 97<br />

4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail ................................................................................ 99<br />

4.9 Adding Banner Sheet for Printing ...................................................................... 101<br />

4.10 File Upload Printing ........................................................................................... 102<br />

Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services................................................................. 106<br />

5.1.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 106<br />

5.1.2 Structure Screen ................................................................................. 107<br />

5.1.3 System Structure ................................................................................ 108<br />

5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers ..................................................................... 109<br />

5.2 Configuring Browser .......................................................................................... 110<br />

5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator .............................................................. 110<br />

5.2.2 For Internet Explorer ........................................................................... 110<br />

5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number ........................................................... 111<br />

5.3 Configuring Machine.......................................................................................... 112<br />

5.4 Activating ........................................................................................................... 113<br />

5.5 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 114<br />

Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment ........................................................................................ 118<br />

1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox.................................................................. 118<br />

1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template................................................ 119<br />

1.2 Flow of Configuring Scanning............................................................................ 120<br />

1.3 Using Scan Features ......................................................................................... 121<br />

1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment................................................... 121<br />

1.3.2 Connecting Cable................................................................................ 121


1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox............................................................................ 122<br />

1.4.1 Setting IP Address .............................................................................. 122<br />

1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation)............................................. 122<br />

1.4.3 Creating Mailbox ................................................................................. 127<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template................................................................... 133<br />

1.5.1 Setting IP Address .............................................................................. 133<br />

1.5.2 Activating FTP Client........................................................................... 133<br />

1.6 Configuring Computer........................................................................................ 138<br />

1.6.1 Using Mailbox...................................................................................... 138<br />

1.6.2 Using Job Template............................................................................. 138<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility ................................................................ 139<br />

1.7.1 Required Environment......................................................................... 139<br />

1.7.2 Installation ........................................................................................... 140<br />

1.7.3 Uninstallation....................................................................................... 142<br />

Chapter 2 Documents for Scanning<br />

2.1 About Documents .............................................................................................. 144<br />

2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes .................................................................... 144<br />

2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing ..................................................... 145<br />

2.1.3 Special Documents to Note................................................................. 145<br />

2.2 Loading Documents........................................................................................... 147<br />

2.2.1 On Document Glass............................................................................ 147<br />

2.2.2 In DADF............................................................................................... 148<br />

2.2.3 Document Orientation ......................................................................... 149<br />

2.2.4 Scanning in Batches ........................................................................... 150<br />

Chapter 3 Scanning With Mailbox<br />

3.1 How to Scan ...................................................................................................... 154<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status......................................................... 156<br />

3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine............................................. 156<br />

3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer .................................................. 158<br />

3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction ............................................ 158<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings ................................................................................. 160<br />

3.3.1 Output Color........................................................................................ 160<br />

3.3.2 Scan Resolution .................................................................................. 162<br />

3.3.3 2 Sided Originals................................................................................. 163<br />

3.3.4 Original Orientation ............................................................................. 166<br />

v


vi<br />

3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals ........................................................................... 168<br />

3.3.6 Scan Size ............................................................................................ 171<br />

3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge .................................................................................. 174<br />

3.3.8 Bound Originals .................................................................................. 177<br />

3.3.9 Border Erase....................................................................................... 180<br />

3.3.10 Original Type ....................................................................................... 183<br />

3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast....................................................................... 185<br />

3.3.12 Auto Exposure..................................................................................... 187<br />

3.3.13 Image Compression............................................................................ 189<br />

3.3.14 File Format.......................................................................................... 191<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer ............................................................... 194<br />

3.4.1 Importing to Application Program........................................................ 194<br />

3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer........................................................... 199<br />

3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using CentreWare Internet Services ............ 201<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox..................................................... 203<br />

3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine.................................................... 203<br />

3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox Viewer).............................. 206<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings....................................................... 208<br />

3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings........................................ 208<br />

3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings...................................................... 212<br />

Chapter 4 Scanning With Job Template<br />

4.1 How to Scan ...................................................................................................... 216<br />

4.1.1 Flow of Scanning................................................................................. 216<br />

4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template) ....................................... 216<br />

4.2 Printing Job Template List ................................................................................. 218<br />

Chapter 5 E-mail Scanning<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail............................................................. 220<br />

5.1.1 Requirements...................................................................................... 220<br />

5.1.2 Scan and Mail ..................................................................................... 220<br />

5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory ................................................................... 223


Part 3 Appendix<br />

Appendix<br />

A Main Specifications............................................................................................ 232<br />

A.1 Product Specifications......................................................................... 232<br />

A.2 Printable Area ..................................................................................... 233<br />

A.3 Internal Fonts ...................................................................................... 234<br />

A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring) ......................................................... 235<br />

B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong> Settings (System Administration Mode)................................... 236<br />

C Precautions/Limitations...................................................................................... 237<br />

C.1 SMB .................................................................................................... 237<br />

C.2 TCP/IP (LPD) ...................................................................................... 239<br />

C.3 NetWare .............................................................................................. 241<br />

C.4 Scan Features..................................................................................... 244<br />

C.5 Print Auditron ...................................................................................... 245<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB .................................................................... 246<br />

D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................................. 246<br />

D.2 Cannot Print ........................................................................................ 247<br />

D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong> Window ............................... 247<br />

D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver ................................................. 248<br />

E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP ................................................................ 249<br />

E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me ...................................... 249<br />

E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP............................ 250<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare.............................................................. 251<br />

F.1 When Not Printed................................................................................ 251<br />

F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears................................................. 254<br />

F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained .......................................... 254<br />

F.4 No Notification..................................................................................... 255<br />

G Troubleshooting forCentreWare Internet Services ............................................. 256<br />

H Automatic Gradation Adjustment ....................................................................... 257<br />

I Glossary ............................................................................................................ 258<br />

J Q & A ................................................................................................................. 260<br />

◆ Index.................................................................................................................................. 263<br />

vii


viii<br />

Related <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />

This section describes the guides provided for this machine.<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>s Supplied<br />

We provide the following guides for optimum usage of this machine.<br />

■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier)<br />

This guide describes all the necessary steps for copying, clearing paper jams,<br />

daily care, setting the various items, and safety information.<br />

■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) (this guide)<br />

This guide describes all the necessary steps for printing and scanning, setting<br />

the network environment, setting the various items, and troubleshooting.<br />

■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile)<br />

This guide describes all the necessary steps for faxing and troubleshooting<br />

when faxing. This guide is provided with the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />

Series machine equipped with the fax function as well as with the optional<br />

Standard G3 Fax Kit.<br />

■ <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (PostScript ® Kit)<br />

This guide describes how to install and use the software that is included in the<br />

PostScript Driver Library. It is included with the PostScript kit.<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>s for Optional Accessories<br />

Optional accessories are also available for this machine. <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s are provided<br />

with the optional accessories exclusively for the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />

Series. These <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s are referred to as “guides for optional accessories”. <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />

for optional accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help.<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>s for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional<br />

accessories and installing software.


Using This <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes the organization of this guide.<br />

This guide has been produced for people who operate the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />

Series machine equipped with the printer function on a regular daily basis. When reading<br />

this guide, read the chapter that is of particular relevance to the operation you are performing.<br />

What You Need to Know<br />

This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating<br />

environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and<br />

how to operate a personal computer.<br />

For details about the environment of the personal computer in use, basic<br />

knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer,<br />

refer to the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s provided with the personal computer, operating<br />

system, and network system.<br />

Organization of This <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This guide consists of the following chapters:<br />

Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment<br />

This chapter describes how to set up this machine as a printer and use it as a<br />

network printer.<br />

Chapter 2 Setting up Network<br />

This chapter describes how to print with Windows network (SMB), TCP/IP<br />

(LPD), Internet Printing, and NetWare.<br />

Chapter 3 Basic Printing<br />

This chapter describes how to install the printer driver and do basic printing.<br />

Chapter 4 Special Printing<br />

This chapter describes how to do special printing like printing with special<br />

papers, adjusting colors.<br />

ix


x<br />

Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

This chapter describes how to use CentreWare Internet Services via a web<br />

browser to change or check printer settings when the machine is in TCP/IP<br />

environment.<br />

Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

This chapter describes how to set up the machine as a scanner, the environment<br />

to be used and how to install the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility.<br />

Chapter 2 Documents for Scanning<br />

This chapter describes how to load documents and some special documents<br />

to note when using this machine as a scanner.<br />

Chapter 3 Scanning With Mailbox<br />

This chapter describes how to scan when using the mailbox.<br />

Chapter 4 Scanning With Job Template<br />

This chapter describes how to scan when using Job Template.<br />

Chapter 5 E-mail Scanning<br />

This chapter describes how to do e-mail scanning when using the optional Email<br />

Scanning feature.<br />

Part 3 Appendix<br />

Appendix<br />

This appendix describes items like the main specifications, precautions/limitations,<br />

troubleshooting, Automatic Gradation Adjustment.


Conventions<br />

1 In this guide, host machine refers to a personal computer or workstation and<br />

“DocumentCentre C400/320/240” refers to “<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> DocumentCentre C400/<br />

320/240”.<br />

2 The following icons are used in this guide.<br />

3<br />

Indicates important information and must be read in detail.<br />

Indicates supplementary information.<br />

Indicates references used in this guide. <strong>Guide</strong> titles are noted without double<br />

quotes while specific sections like “1.9.2 Disabling the Power Saver Mode”<br />

are found within double quotes.<br />

Special marks/characters used in this guide.<br />

“ ” : Double quotes indicate the following:<br />

●Messages that appear in the touch panel display and computer<br />

screens.<br />

● Characters to be entered.<br />

●Feature names or buttons that are difficult to understand.<br />

Bold face : Bold face characters refer to selections made like options on the<br />

screen, hard or soft buttons, and keys from the keyboard.<br />

For example: Press ESC.<br />

4 When a checkbox is checked, it indicates ON, otherwise it indicates OFF.<br />

5<br />

The item with the radio button checked is the selected item.<br />

xi


xii<br />

Safety Notes<br />

Read this section carefully before using the DocumentCentre 400/320/240 Series to ensure<br />

that you operate your machine safely.<br />

Also, refer to the “Safety Notes” section of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

This section explains the graphic symbols used in this guide.<br />

is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or<br />

condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in severe injury<br />

or loss of life.<br />

is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or<br />

condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in safety<br />

hazards to personnel or damage to the equipment.<br />

This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />

specific operating procedure that requires close<br />

attention. Read and follow instructions carefully<br />

to ensure the task is accomplished safely.<br />

This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />

specific operating procedure that must not be<br />

performed. Read instructions carefully and do<br />

not perform any procedures that are prohibited.<br />

This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />

specific operating procedure that must be<br />

emphasized in order to operate the machine<br />

safely. Read and follow instructions carefully.<br />

Power and Earth Connections<br />

Switch off the machine and the computer before connecting the interface cable. Connecting<br />

the cable or cord with a live machine and computer can cause electric shocks.


Switching Off<br />

Others<br />

● When the power is switched off, print data remaining in the machine and information<br />

spooled in the memory will be erased.<br />

Before switching off the power during normal operation, ensure that the processing<br />

of data stored in the memory is done.<br />

Also, ensure that the touch panel display is completely blank before switching on<br />

the power again.<br />

● If the power is switched on and off continuously, you might not be able to start or<br />

stop the machine properly. If you cannot stop the machine properly, pull out the<br />

electric cord before inserting it again and switching on the power.<br />

xiii


Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>


1Setting <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments ......................................................................... 4<br />

1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong> .................................................................. 4<br />

1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong>.............................................................. 5<br />

1.2 Connecting Interface Cable.............................................................. 10<br />

1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface ....................................... 10<br />

1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface ..................................... 11<br />

1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface ................................. 11<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address ........................................................................... 13<br />

1.3.1 Setting IP Address............................................................ 14<br />

1.4 Setting Port ...................................................................................... 18<br />

1.4.1 Activating Port................................................................... 18<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation ........................................................................... 22


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 4<br />

1<br />

1.1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

This section describes the different printer environments that can be set up for this machine.<br />

When connected to a computer directly, this machine can be used as a local printer.<br />

When connected to a network, this machine can be used as a network printer. As this<br />

machine supports multi-protocol, it can be shared among different network environments.<br />

1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Using parallel interface<br />

Connects this machine to a computer by parallel interface for printing.<br />

Use only parallel interface cables provided by our company. Using parallel interface cables from<br />

other company may lead to electric wave obstruction.


1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Windows network (SMB)<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing file or printer on Windows<br />

95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows<br />

XP. Using SMB, print data or settings can be sent directly to a printer on the<br />

same network (Ethernet interface) without going through a server.<br />

You can begin printing by activating the SMB port, and then registering the<br />

printer on the network on each of the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me,<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating system (OS).<br />

Depending on the network environment, you may need to set up IP address,<br />

subnet mask and gateway address for the printer. Consult your network administrator<br />

for details on setting the needed item.<br />

“2.1 Windows Network (SMB)” (P. 26) for details on the settings.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

5


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

6<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

This machine supports TCP/IP (LPD). The following describes the different connections<br />

in brief:<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />

Using our TCP/IP Direct Print Utility, print data can be sent directly to a printer on<br />

the same network (Ethernet interface) without going through a server. TCP/IP<br />

Direct Print Utility is installed together with the printer driver.<br />

You will need to set up the IP address on the printer and the Windows 95,<br />

Windows 98, Windows Me computer.<br />

“2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)” (P. 28) for details on the settings.<br />

■For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />

Using the LPR port for the OS, print data can be sent directly for printing. You will<br />

need to set up the IP address on the printer and the Windows NT 4.0, Windows<br />

2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X computer. Once the printer has registered on<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X computer is shared,<br />

you can send data from Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me machine with<br />

shared printer for printing.<br />

“2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)” (P. 28) for details on the settings.


Internet printing<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

This machine supports Internet Printing Protocol (IPP). As Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XP, Windows Me is installed with the client software (IPP port monitor)<br />

needed to print to a printer supporting IPP, you can specify the printer from the<br />

Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard. Using IPP, you can print to a remote printer through the<br />

Internet or intranet.<br />

NetWare<br />

“2.3 Using Internet Printing” (P. 30) for details on the settings.<br />

This machine can be used as a network OS in environment using Novell Net-<br />

Ware.<br />

“2.4 NetWare” (P. 32) for details on the settings.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

7


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

8<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

EtherTalk (option)<br />

As this machine supports EtherTalk protocol, you can print from Macintosh.<br />

To print from Macintosh, you will need the PostScript Software Kit (option). See the PostScript Software<br />

Kit guide for details for using it.


Token Ring (option)<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

This machine supports Token Ring. When installed with the optional interface<br />

board for Token Ring, you can use the printer in a network environment with Net-<br />

Ware or TCP/IP existing itself or together.<br />

When the interface board for Token Ring is installed, the Ethernet interface cannot be used. Also, the<br />

items which can be set will be different. See “2.4 NetWare” (P. 32) for details on the settings.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

9


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 10<br />

1<br />

1.2<br />

Connecting Interface<br />

Cable<br />

Use the parallel interface to connect this machine to a host device directly. Use an Ethernet<br />

interface to connect to a network. You can also use the Token Ring (option) to make a connection.<br />

1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to connect with the parallel interface.<br />

To connect to a host device using parallel interface, you will need the parallel interface cable provided<br />

by our company as an optional product. For details on this optional product, see “Appendix B<br />

Optional Accessories” in “Part 3 Appendix” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

1 Insert the interface cable connector to<br />

the parallel interface connector of this<br />

machine and secure it by the wire clips<br />

on both sides.<br />

2 Connect the other end of the interface<br />

cable connector to the host device.<br />

3 Turn on the power of the host device.<br />

4 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />

If necessary, you may select the following settings:<br />

● Port Status (Default: Enabled)<br />

● Print Mode (Default: Auto)<br />

● PJL (Default: Enabled)<br />

● Auto Eject Time (Default: 30 Seconds)<br />

● Adobe Communication Protocol (Default: Standard)<br />

● Bi-directional Communication (Default: Enabled)<br />

For details on the items to be set, see “5.6 Network Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier).<br />

● Adobe Communication Protocol can be set when the PostScript Software Kit (option) has been<br />

installed.


1.2 Connecting Interface Cable<br />

● Except for Bi-directional Communication, there is no need to change the default setting of the other<br />

items for normal use. However, it might be necessary to make changes depending on the OS of each<br />

host device.<br />

1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface<br />

Procedure<br />

The types of Ethernet interface supported are as follows:<br />

● 100Base-TX<br />

● 10Base-T<br />

By default, 100Base-TX and 10Base-T will be automatically interchanged.<br />

The following procedure describes how to connect with the Ethernet interface.<br />

1 Connect the interface cable to the<br />

Ethernet interface connector.<br />

Use only interface cable meant for the network connection<br />

in use. To replace network cable, contact our Customer<br />

Support Center.<br />

2 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />

1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface<br />

The types of Token Ring interface supported are as follows:<br />

● UTP<br />

● STP<br />

When the Token Ring interface board is installed, the Ethernet interface cannot be used.<br />

● To set up the Token Ring, you will need the Token Ring Installation kit besides the Token Ring<br />

interface board. The Token Ring Installation kit will be installed by our customer engineer. For<br />

more details, please contact our Customer Support Center.<br />

● When the Token Ring interface port is installed, the MAC address will be changed.<br />

● When using gateway in Token Ring environment, set Source Routing to On.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

11


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

12<br />

1.2 Connecting Interface Cable<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to connect by the Token Ring interface.<br />

1 Connect the Token Ring interface cable<br />

to the Token Ring interface connector.<br />

Do not connect the interface cable to the two Token Ring<br />

interface port connectors. This may cause poor transmission<br />

or breakdown.<br />

Use only interface cable meant for the network connection<br />

in use.<br />

2 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />

If necessary, set the following items on the printer control panel (Network/Port>):<br />

● IPX/SPX FrameType (Default: Auto)<br />

● Token Ring - Transmit Rate (Default: Auto)<br />

● Token Ring - Max Packet Size (Default: 1,500 Octet)<br />

● Token Ring - Source Routing (Default: Off)<br />

For normal use, there is no need to change the default settings of all the items.


1.3<br />

Setting IP Address<br />

This section describes how to set the IP address.<br />

Depending on the network environment, you may need to set the subnet mask and gateway<br />

address for the machine. If your network environment has a Reverse ARP Protocol (RARP),<br />

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or BOOTP environment, you may obtain the<br />

address automatically from each of these servers.<br />

By default, these items will be obtained automatically from the DHCP server.<br />

To check if the address has been obtained from the DHCP, RARP or BOOTP servers, either<br />

carry out the procedure in “1.3.1 Setting IP Address” (P. 14) and then check the settings of<br />

the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address; or see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) to print out the System Settings List and then<br />

under TCP/IP in Communication Settings, check the IP address, subnet mask and gateway<br />

address.<br />

If the address has not been obtained automatically or to set the settings manually, see<br />

“1.3.1 Setting IP Address” (P. 14) for details for setting the address. You may also change<br />

the way to obtain the address.<br />

● Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server. Check with your system<br />

administrator for any queries on the DHCP, WINS environments.<br />

● When using the BOOTP server, change Get IP Address to BOOTP. For details on the way to change, see “5.6<br />

Network Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). Check with your system administrator for<br />

any queries on the BOOTP environment.<br />

You may set the method of obtaining an address by using either the System Administration<br />

Mode through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● For details on System Administration Mode, see “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1<br />

Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

● For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet<br />

Services)” (P. 105).<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 13<br />

1


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

14<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

1.3.1 Setting IP Address<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to set the IP address using the touch<br />

panel display.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select Protocol Settings.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

<br />

Scan Mode Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

15


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

16<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

6 Select TCP/IP - Get IP Address and then Change Settings.<br />

The display of Current Settings of TCP/IP - IP Address, TCP/IP - Subnet Mask, TCP/IP - Gateway<br />

Address might differ according to your network environment used.<br />

Protocol Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Token Ring - Transmit Rate Auto<br />

2. Token Ring -Max Packet Size 1500 Octet<br />

3. Token Ring - Source Routing Off<br />

4. TCP/IP - Get IP Address DHCP<br />

5. TCP/IP - IP Address DHCP in Progress<br />

The TCP/IP - Get IP Address screen is displayed.<br />

7 Select Manual and then Save.<br />

When obtaining address from the BOOTP server, select the BOOTP Server button, followed by the<br />

Save button and then proceed to step 12.<br />

2. TCP/IP - Get IP Address<br />

DHCP<br />

BOOTP<br />

RARP<br />

Manual<br />

The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select TCP/IP - IP Address and then Change Settings.<br />

Protocol Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Token Ring - Transmit Rate Auto<br />

2. Token Ring -Max Packet Size 1500 Octet<br />

3. Token Ring - Source Routing Off<br />

4. TCP/IP - Get IP Address Manual<br />

5. TCP/IP - IP Address<br />

(Not Set)<br />

The TCP/IP - IP Address screen is displayed.<br />

1/2<br />

Cancel<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Save<br />

IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address will<br />

be automatically extracted from the DHCP Server.<br />

Extraction begins when the Exit button is selected.<br />

1/2<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

9 Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad.<br />

Once three digits are entered, the cursor will move automatically to a next bit. To move to the next bit<br />

before three digits are entered, select the Next button.<br />

● Enter the address in a xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format. xxx refer to the value between 0 to 255. However, the<br />

following address cannot be entered: 224 to 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />

● To correct a invalid entered value, press the C button on the control panel, and then re-enter.<br />

5. TCP/IP - IP Address<br />

. . .<br />

10 Select Save once you have entered the IP address.<br />

The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />

11 If necessary, repeat steps 8 to 10 to set the subnet mask and gateway<br />

address.<br />

● The subnet mask and gateway address cannot be set if the IP address has not been entered.<br />

● Enter the IP address in a xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.<br />

● Enter the subnet mask using a combination of the following values: 0, 128, 192, 224, 248, 252, 255.<br />

However, 0 cannot be entered as one of the middle bits.<br />

● Enter the gateway address within the limit of 0 to 255. However, the following address cannot be<br />

entered: 224 to 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />

● When the gateway adress does not need to be set, enter “0.0.0.0”.<br />

12 Once you have entered the IP address, select Close repeatedly until<br />

the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

13 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Next<br />

Cancel<br />

Save<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

17


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 18<br />

1<br />

1.4<br />

Setting Port<br />

This section describes the procedure on activating the port to be used for printing after the<br />

IP address has been set or checked.<br />

You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode through the touch<br />

panel display or CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

If the port has been used already in the Enabled state, the procedure in this section is not<br />

necessary. If the needed port is in the Disabled state, carry out the procedure.<br />

To check if the port is Enabled, either carry out the following procedure in “1.4.1 Activating<br />

Port” and then check the port status; or see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) to print out the System Settings List and then check the item<br />

under Communication Settings.<br />

● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details<br />

on System Administration Mode and the ports that can be set.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

1.4.1 Activating Port<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to set the LPD port to Enabled (default:<br />

Disabled) using the touch panel display.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


1.4 Setting Port<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

Setup Menu<br />

<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

Scan Mode Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

19


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

20<br />

1.4 Setting Port<br />

5 Select Port Settings.<br />

<br />

<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

6 Check Current Settings for LPD.<br />

If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting.<br />

If it is Disabled, carry out the setting. If it is Enabled, proceed to step 12.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

For the remaining steps, LPD is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />

7 Select LPD and then Change Settings.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The LPD screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />

LPD<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Disabled<br />

The LPD - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />

1. LPD - Port Status<br />

Disable<br />

Enable<br />

The LPD screen is displayed.<br />

1.4 Setting Port<br />

To activate the LPD port, the IP address must be set. If the IP address has not been set, selecting the<br />

Enable button will display the TCP/IP - Get IP Address screen. For details on setting the IP address,<br />

see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13).<br />

10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />

Close.<br />

LPD<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Enabled<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Cancel<br />

11 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set SNMP to Enabled.<br />

If there are other ports needed for printing, repeat steps 7 to 10 to set their status to Enabled.<br />

12 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

13 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Save<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

21


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 22<br />

1<br />

1.5<br />

Memory Allocation<br />

This section describes how to allocate memory.<br />

Depending on the use, you can allocate memory in this machine according to the memory<br />

types in the table. The memory types that can be allocated may be different according to the<br />

optional products installed.<br />

Print page buffer<br />

PCL memory<br />

*PS :with PostScript Software Kit installed<br />

Except for print page buffer, memory allocation of the other memory types can be done<br />

either through the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services. Memory allocation<br />

will change when power is on or system is reset.<br />

● “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the capacity of each<br />

memory type, spool default values and the way of setting.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

Print page buffer<br />

Memory Types Standard PS*<br />

PostScript memory ×<br />

Receive buffer<br />

This is the area for drawing the actual print image. The area to be allocated to<br />

print page buffer will be the remaining area after all other memory types have<br />

been allocated. As such, the capacity of print page buffer cannot be changed<br />

directly. The actual capacity allocated for print page buffer can be checked under<br />

Memory of the System Settings List. You can also use CentreWare Internet Services<br />

to check.<br />

To print high-resolution document, configure your settings to increase the capacity<br />

of the print page buffer.<br />

● “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on printing<br />

the System Settings List.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

When using the Page Print Mode of the PCL printer driver, you need to install at least 192 Mbyte of<br />

memory. See the on-line Help file for details on Print Page Mode.


PCL memory<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation<br />

This specifies the memory capacity to be used for the PCL5e. This memory is to<br />

store the interim data for creating the print image. By increasing the memory<br />

capacity, the printing speed may also be increased.<br />

PostScript memory<br />

This specifies the memory capacity to be used for PostScript. This item is displayed<br />

when the PostScript Software Kit (option) has been installed.<br />

Receive buffer<br />

This is the area for temporarily storing data received from the computer. A<br />

receive buffer is prepared for each port to enable receiving of data from multiple<br />

ports at the same time. The types of receive buffer are as follows:<br />

● Receive Buffer - Parallel<br />

● Receive Buffer - LPD Spool<br />

● Receive Buffer - NetWare<br />

● Receive Buffer - SMB Spool<br />

● Receive Buffer - IPP Spool<br />

● Receive Buffer - EtherTalk<br />

● Receive Buffer - Port 9100<br />

If the capacity of the receive buffer is increased, the processing of printing might<br />

be faster. Adjust the buffer capacity according to the print data volume. For ports<br />

that are not in use, it is recommended to disable them and allocate their memory<br />

for other uses.<br />

For LPD/SMB/IPP, you can specify spool processing. The default values are Off.<br />

The types of spool include Memory and Hard Disk. When Memory has been set,<br />

data exceeding the allocated capacity cannot be received. When this occurs, set<br />

it to Hard Disk.<br />

● To set EtherTalk, you will need the PostScript Software Kit (option).<br />

● For IPP, Memory cannot be set.<br />

■Setting Spool<br />

Spool mode<br />

This is the mode to save print data output from application program to the spool<br />

file in this machine temporarily for print processing. The spool file destination<br />

can be selected from the memory inside the machine or the internal hard disk.<br />

As the print data that has been spooled is processed in this machine, they will<br />

be released quickly by the application program. Processing from multiple computers<br />

can be done at the same time.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

23


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

24<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation<br />

Non-spool mode<br />

This is the mode used to receive and process print data output from application<br />

program in this machine. If the machine is processing a print request from a<br />

computer, print request from other computers cannot be received.


2Setting up Network<br />

2.1 Windows Network (SMB) ................................................................. 26<br />

2.1.1 System Structure .............................................................. 26<br />

2.1.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 27<br />

2.2 TCP/IP (LPD) ................................................................................... 28<br />

2.2.1 System Structure .............................................................. 28<br />

2.2.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 29<br />

2.3 Using Internet Printing ..................................................................... 30<br />

2.3.1 System Structure .............................................................. 30<br />

2.3.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 31<br />

2.4 NetWare ........................................................................................... 32<br />

2.4.1 System Structure .............................................................. 32<br />

2.4.2 Interface............................................................................ 32<br />

2.4.3 Setting Procedure............................................................. 33


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

26<br />

2.1<br />

Windows Network (SMB)<br />

This section describes how to connect this machine to a Windows network using SMB.<br />

2.1.1 System Structure<br />

SMB is a protocol for sharing file or printer on Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. Using SMB,<br />

print data or settings can be sent directly to a printer on the same network (Ethernet<br />

interface) without going through a server.<br />

You can begin printing by activating the SMB port on the machine, and then registering<br />

the printer on the network on each of the Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP OS.<br />

Depending on the network environment, you may need to set IP address, subnet<br />

mask and gateway address for the machine. Consult your network administrator<br />

for details on setting the needed item.<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● The receiving of printing by IP address can be limited. For details, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings”<br />

in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).


2.1.2 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure is as follows:<br />

2.1 Windows Network (SMB)<br />

1 Configuring this machine:<br />

Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the<br />

port for SMB to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />

● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

● By overwriting the config.txt files of this machine, the setting/changing of SMB can be done on the<br />

Windows computer.<br />

2 Configuring the computer:<br />

Install the printer driver.<br />

● When using NetBEUI as the transport protocol, check that the NetBEUI protocol has been installed<br />

on the host device. If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />

● When using TCP/IP as the transport protocol, check that the TCP/IP protocol has been installed on<br />

the host device. If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it. IP address is needed on<br />

both the host device and this machine.<br />

“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) for details on how to install the printer<br />

driver.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

27


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

28<br />

2.2<br />

TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

This section describes how to connect the machine to Windows computer using TCP/IP<br />

(LPD).<br />

2.2.1 System Structure<br />

This machine supports TCP/IP (LPD). The following describes the different connections<br />

in brief:<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />

Using our TCP/IP Direct Print Utility, print data can be sent directly to a printer on<br />

the same network (Ethernet interface) for printing without going through a server.<br />

TCP/IP Direct Print Utility is installed together with the printer driver.<br />

You will need to set the IP address on the machine and the Windows 95, Windows<br />

98, Windows Me computer.<br />

■For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />

Print data can be sent directly and printed using the standard LPR port for OS<br />

(standard TCP/IP port for Windows 2000). You will need to set the IP address on<br />

the machine and the Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />

computer.<br />

Once the machine registered on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,<br />

Mac OS X computer is shared, you can also send data from Windows 95, Windows<br />

98, Windows Me machine to the shared machine for printing.<br />

The receiving of printing by IP address can be limited. For details, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).


2.2.2 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure is as follows:<br />

2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

1 Configuring this machine:<br />

Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the IP<br />

address and set the port for LPD to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />

● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

2 Configuring the computer:<br />

Install the printer driver.<br />

Before installing the printer driver, check the following items:<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />

Is TCP/IP protocol installed? If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />

■For Windows NT 4.0<br />

Is TCP/IP protocol and Microsoft TCP/IP printing installed? If not installed, see the manual of<br />

Windows NT 4.0 to install it.<br />

■For Windows 2000, Windows XP<br />

Is Internet protocol (TCP/IP) installed? If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />

For details on how to install the printer driver, see“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers”<br />

(P. 50) for windows or see the PostScript software kit guide for Macintosh.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

29


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

30<br />

2.3<br />

Using Internet Printing<br />

This section describes how to use Internet printing from Windows 2000, Windows XP or<br />

Windows Me through Internet Printing Protocol (IPP).<br />

2.3.1 System Structure<br />

This machine supports IPP. As Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Me is<br />

installed with the client software (IPP port monitor) needed to print to a printer<br />

supporting IPP, you can specify the printer from the Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard. Using<br />

IPP, you can print to a remote printer through the Internet or intranet.<br />

You will need to set the IP address on the machine and the Windows Me, Windows<br />

2000, Windows XP computer.<br />

To use Internet printing on Windows Me, the IPP port must be installed. For details on installing the<br />

IPP port, see the manual of Windows Me.<br />

● Transport protocol<br />

TCP/IP<br />

● Target OS<br />

Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2)<br />

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2)<br />

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />

Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />

Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition


2.3.2 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure is as follows:<br />

2.3 Using Internet Printing<br />

1 Configuring this machine:<br />

Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the IP<br />

address and the port for IPP to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />

● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

2 Configuring the computer:<br />

Set the print destination and install the printer driver.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

31


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

32<br />

2.4 NetWare<br />

This section describes how to connect the machine to a Novell NetWare-network.<br />

2.4.1 System Structure<br />

The system structure is as follows:<br />

As a network OS, this machine supports Novell NetWare (version 5.x, 6.x) and<br />

the printer server (PServer) mode only using binary and NDS.<br />

In the PServer mode, this machine will be the print server and will print jobs from<br />

the print queue. The created printer will use up one user license of the file server.<br />

You can print from the machine in an NDPS environment by using Novell NDPS Gateway. Before you<br />

start printing, set the machine to operate in a NetWare print environment, or start LPD. You need to<br />

set them as the Gateway destination when you set up the Novell NDPS Gateway. However, the<br />

attributes that can be acquired and set in NDPS are not supported.<br />

2.4.2 Interface<br />

■Supported interface<br />

● 100Base-TX<br />

● 10Base-T<br />

■Supported frame type<br />

● Ethernet II<br />

● IEEE802.3<br />

● IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2<br />

● IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2/SNAP<br />

This machine will send out packet of each frame type on the connected network,<br />

and automatically activate to the frame type that responded first.<br />

However, if other protocol exists together on the same network, use Ethernet II.


2.4 NetWare<br />

The network system kit (e.g. HUB) may not match the automatic setting of the frame type. If the data<br />

link indicator of the network system kit connected to this machine is not lighted, change the frame type<br />

setting of this machine to match the frame type of the file server. Use CentreWare Internet Services to<br />

do the setting and see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)”<br />

(P. 105) for details.<br />

2.4.3 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to set up this machine by PServer mode<br />

to the network environment using NetWare.<br />

1 Checking host device name and network address:<br />

By referring to “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier), print out the System Settings List and check the host device name and<br />

network address printed under the NetWare item.<br />

2 Configuring this machine:<br />

Set the NetWare port to Enabled on this machine beforehand.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />

3 Configuring the computer:<br />

Install the printer driver supported by this machine to the computer. The printer<br />

driver varies according to the OS used.<br />

For the host device, use a personal computer that can function as a NetWare host device.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

33


3Basic Printing<br />

3.1 Flow of Printing (Windows) .............................................................. 36<br />

3.2 About Paper ..................................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.1 Difference From Copying .................................................. 37<br />

3.2.2 Caution for Printing ........................................................... 37<br />

3.2.3 Paper Supply .................................................................... 38<br />

3.2.4 Outputting Paper............................................................... 39<br />

3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 ........................................... 39<br />

3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ............................. 40<br />

3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray.................................. 45<br />

3.3 Printing Features.............................................................................. 46<br />

3.3.1 Before Printing .................................................................. 46<br />

3.3.2 Printing Procedure............................................................ 46<br />

3.3.3 Setting Printing Features .................................................. 47<br />

3.3.4 Using On-line Help............................................................ 49<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ......................................... 50<br />

3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................ 50<br />

3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong>........................................................ 53<br />

3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ......................................... 54<br />

3.5 Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line ................................................................. 56<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status.......................................... 57<br />

3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer .................................. 57<br />

3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>........................................ 58<br />

3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction........................... 60


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

36<br />

3.1<br />

Flow of Printing (Windows)<br />

This section describes the basic flow of printing from Windows environment.<br />

(This may differ according to the client or system structure used.)<br />

Refer to the guide of the application program for details on the process.<br />

If necessary<br />

Set port<br />

Check the following before sending print data from the client:<br />

● Check the status of the port to be used in the System Administration Mode.<br />

“5.7 Print Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />

process.<br />

Specify printing from application<br />

program.<br />

If necessary<br />

If necessary<br />

Activate application program used on the client.<br />

Refer to the guide of the application program for details on the process.<br />

Stop printing<br />

“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) for details on the process.<br />

Output<br />

“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) for details on the process.<br />

End


3.2<br />

About Paper<br />

This section describes the points to be note about the paper to be used for printing with the<br />

machine. Other than these, there is no difference on using paper for copying and printing.<br />

“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on paper types suitable or<br />

unsuitable for copying and loading in each tray.<br />

3.2.1 Difference From Copying<br />

● When using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), there is a restriction on the orientation of<br />

loading paper.<br />

“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on the orientation of loading<br />

paper and using tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

3.2.2 Caution for Printing<br />

● If the paper size or type used for printing is different from the selection on the<br />

printer driver, or if the paper is loaded in an unsuitable paper tray, it may cause<br />

paper jam. In order to print correctly, select the correct paper size and type, as<br />

well as the paper tray.<br />

● When printing with 12 × 18" paper size, move the paper guide before loading<br />

the paper.<br />

“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on how to print or move the<br />

paper guide.<br />

● When printing with non-standard paper sizes, you may need to customize the<br />

paper size on the printer driver.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on customizing paper size.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

37


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

38<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

3.2.3 Paper Supply<br />

This section describes supplying different paper types for use with this machine.<br />

When printing with plain paper, all paper trays can be used. The paper sizes that<br />

can be loaded depend on the paper trays.<br />

“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on suitable paper<br />

sizes.<br />

When printing with non-standard paper sizes, even with the plain paper type, use<br />

tray 5 (Bypass Tray). You will need to customize the paper size on the printer<br />

driver in order to print.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on customizing paper size and the method of printing.<br />

When printing with special paper, such as transparencies and heavyweight<br />

paper, use tray 5 (Bypass Tray). On the properties dialog box of the printer<br />

driver, be sure to select Tray 5 (Bypass) from the Paper Source menu on the<br />

Paper/Output tab, and then select the correct paper type from the Paper Type<br />

(Bypass Tray) menu.<br />

Automatic tray switching<br />

When a paper tray using plain paper runs out of paper during printing, it can be<br />

configured to switch automatically to another tray with the same paper size and<br />

orientation to continue printing.<br />

This Auto Tray Switch feature works only when Auto has been selected from the<br />

Paper Source menu on the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Auto Tray Switch can be individually set for each of paper trays 1 – 4. For trays<br />

loaded with paper type you do not use often, you may not want to include them<br />

as the target paper tray for tray switching.<br />

“5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) for details on how to configure this feature. You can also use CentreWare Internet Services<br />

to configure the settings. For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring<br />

From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

This Auto Tray Switch feature is displayed as Disable Auto Tray Switch in the Common Menu and<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be used as the target tray for this Auto Tray Switch feature.<br />

By default, Auto Tray Switch is enabled.


3.2.4 Outputting Paper<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

When the offset output tray or finisher has been installed, you can use Job Offset<br />

feature in addition to the usual way of outputting paper during printing.<br />

For the finisher, suitable paper sizes for the Job Offset feature are A3, B4, A4, A4 , B5 , 8K, 8×10",<br />

8.5×11", 8.5×11" , 8.5×13", 8.5×14", and 11×17".<br />

The various ways of outputting paper when the Job Offset feature is combined<br />

with the Collated feature of the printer driver are as follows:<br />

Example of printing three sets of a 3-page document<br />

Job Offset on<br />

Job Offset off<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on the Job Offset and Collated features.<br />

Output side of paper<br />

Collated Uncollated<br />

1 2<br />

3 4<br />

1 Printing will be done by set (in the sequence of pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3)<br />

and then output offset from each set.<br />

2 Printing will be done by page number (in the sequence of pages 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3)<br />

and then output offset from the previous print job.<br />

3 Printing will be done by set (in the sequence of pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3)<br />

and then output without offset.<br />

4<br />

Printing will be done by page number (in the sequence of pages 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3)<br />

and then output without offset.<br />

The paper is usually output with the printed side facing down. However, when<br />

output to the optional side output tray, the printed side will be facing up.<br />

3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4<br />

For details on how to load paper, see “Chapter 2 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

39


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

40<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)<br />

To print special paper such as transparencies, heavyweight and non-standard<br />

paper sizes that cannot be loaded in trays 1 - 4, use tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

● Loading special paper such as transparencies, heavyweight, and non-standard paper sizes in trays<br />

1 - 4 may cause paper jam or machine breakdown.<br />

● Use only transparencies exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or<br />

machine breakdown.<br />

● Use only lables exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine<br />

breakdown.<br />

● You do not need to specify the paper size/type on the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen which is displayed on<br />

the control panel (touch panel display) when paper is loaded.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing special papers like transparencies.<br />

When printing with tray 5 (Bypass Tray), be sure to select Tray 5 (Bypass) from<br />

the Paper Source menu on the Paper/Output tab, and then select the correct<br />

paper type from the Paper Type (Bypass Tray) menu on the printer driver<br />

screen.


3.2 About Paper<br />

The range of paper that can be used for tray 5 (Bypass Tray) is as follows:<br />

Paper Size<br />

Non-standard paper<br />

sizes* 3 :<br />

Short edge 100 – 305 mm<br />

Long edge 140 – 482.6 mm<br />

Standard paper sizes:<br />

A3, B4, A4, A4 * 5 ,<br />

B5, B5 * 5 , A5 * 5 , B6, A6,<br />

8K, 5.5×8.5”, 5.5×8.5” * 5 ,<br />

8.5×11", 8.5×11" * 5 ,<br />

8.5×13", 8.5×14", 11×17",<br />

12×18"* 4 , Custom 1-5<br />

Paper Weight<br />

G.S.M.* 1<br />

55 – 220<br />

g/m 2<br />

Ream<br />

Weight* 2<br />

47 – 189<br />

kg<br />

Paper Type<br />

Bond<br />

(64 – less than<br />

105 g/m2 )<br />

Plain<br />

(64 – less than<br />

105 g/m2 )<br />

Recycled<br />

(64 – less than<br />

105 g/m2 )<br />

Heavyweight 1 -<br />

Side 2<br />

(106 – 169 g/m2 )<br />

Heavyweight 2 -<br />

Side 2<br />

(170 – 220 g/m2 )<br />

Transparency* 6<br />

Lightweight<br />

(55 – 63 g/m2 )<br />

Labels<br />

Custom 1-5<br />

Loading<br />

Capacity<br />

Up to 10 mm;<br />

100 sheets<br />

(P paper)<br />

*1 G.S.M. is the weight of a sheet of paper with an area of one square meter.<br />

*2 Ream weight refers to the weight of 1,000 sheets of paper of size 788 × 1,091 mm.<br />

*3 When printing with non-standard paper sizes, you will need to customize the paper size<br />

on the printer driver. For details on customizing paper size, see the On-line Help of the<br />

printer driver.<br />

*4 When printing with 12×18" paper size, move the paper guide before loading the paper.<br />

For details on moving the paper guide, see “ Moving paper guide” (P. 44).<br />

*5 To set orientation, you need to configure the setting on the Configuration tab of the<br />

printer driver. For details, see the on-line Help of the printer driver.<br />

*6 For transparency, A4, A3, Letter and Ledger sizes can be used. Moreover, it is recommended<br />

to load in the portrait direction when loading transparencies in tray 5 (Bypass<br />

Tray).<br />

● If the paper size or type used for printing is different from the selection on the printer driver, it may<br />

cause paper jam. In order to print correctly, select the correct paper size and type, as well as the<br />

paper tray.<br />

● When outputting transparencies continuously, they might stick to each other. To prevent that,<br />

remove about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

41


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

42<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

Loading procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

Display the Paper/Output tab to configure the settings.<br />

Only for bond, plain paper, recycled and heavyweight, you can print on the<br />

reverse side of this paper that has been printed before.<br />

Use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is same when using<br />

other OS.<br />

1 Open tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

If necessary, pull out the extension tray. The extension<br />

tray can be pulled out in two stages.<br />

2 Check the position of the paper guide<br />

located in front of tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

Set the paper guide to the Standard position for normal<br />

use.<br />

If the paper guide is at the 12" (305 mm) position, move<br />

it back to the Standard position. Also, for paper sizes<br />

with width exceeding that of A3 i.e. 297 mm (e.g. 12 ×<br />

18"), move the paper guide. For details on moving the<br />

paper guide, see “ Moving paper guide” (P. 44).


3 Insert paper with the side to be printed<br />

facing down, and push it right to the<br />

end while aligning it with the paper<br />

guide in front of you.<br />

● As settings can be done when printing from the computer,<br />

you do not need to specify the paper size/type<br />

on the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen which is displayed on<br />

the control panel (touch panel display) when paper is<br />

loaded.<br />

● Do not load different paper types together. It may<br />

cause paper jam.<br />

● Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line. It<br />

may cause paper jam or machine breakdown.<br />

● When printing heavyweight, curl the tip of the paper<br />

as shown on the right diagram if paper cannot be fed<br />

into the machine. However, if paper is too curled or<br />

creased, it may cause paper jams.<br />

Different paper sizes cannot be loaded at the same time.<br />

4 Adjust the paper size guide to fit the<br />

paper loaded.<br />

5 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

6 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box may differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

7 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

43


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

44<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

8 From Paper Source, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />

9 Select the paper type from Paper Type (Bypass Tray).<br />

Here, we use plain paper as an example.<br />

When printing on the reverse side, select from Bond, Plain, Recycled, Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m2 )-<br />

Side 2, and Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m2 )-Side 2.<br />

10 Click OK.<br />

When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent that, remove<br />

about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

Moving paper guide<br />

When printing paper size with width exceeding that of A3 i.e. 297 mm (e.g.<br />

12×18"), move the paper guide to 12" (305 mm).<br />

When printing is done, be sure to move the paper guide back to the Standard position.


Procedure<br />

1 Slide the paper guide which is in front<br />

of tray 5 (Bypass Tray) to 12" (305<br />

mm).<br />

3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

For details on how to change the paper size, see “2.2 Changing the Size of<br />

Paper in Trays” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Also, the type of paper suitable for use depends on the paper tray. For details,<br />

see “2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

45


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

46<br />

3.3<br />

This section describes printing features.<br />

3.3.1 Before Printing<br />

Printing Features<br />

In order to print from the computer, install the printer driver on the computer.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver is a software which converts print data or instructions from the<br />

computer into data that can be understood by the printer.<br />

For details on how to install the printer driver, see “3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50).<br />

● When using the Auditron feature, printing cannot be done if the user name and password of the<br />

machine are not correctly set at Specify Job Owner on the Configuration tab of the printer properties<br />

dialog box. For details on the settings of Specify Job Owner, see the on-line Help of the printer<br />

driver. For details on the Auditron feature, see “Chapter 6 Managing Totals and Outputting<br />

Reports” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

● For details on direct printing of TIFF images, see the Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM.<br />

3.3.2 Printing Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

Printing procedure differs according to the application program used. For details,<br />

see the guide of your application program.<br />

This describes Wordpad which is included in Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 and Windows XP as an example.<br />

1 Activate Wordpad and create a print data.<br />

2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

The Print dialog box is displayed.


3 Check Name and then click Properties if necessary.<br />

The printer properties dialog box appears.<br />

4 Select the options.<br />

5 Click OK.<br />

6 Click OK from the Print dialog box.<br />

Printing will start.<br />

3.3.3 Setting Printing Features<br />

3.3 Printing Features<br />

Almost all printing features are set on the printer properties dialog box which<br />

appears when either printing from the application program or selecting Properties<br />

from the menu of the printer icon.<br />

From this displayed properties dialog box, select the features in each tab.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on the options of the printer driver and the way of<br />

selecting the options. For details on using the On-line Help, see “3.3.4 Using On-line Help” (P. 49) .<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

47


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

48<br />

3.3 Printing Features<br />

■When displayed from application program<br />

■When displayed from menu of the printer icon<br />

● For Windows NT 4.0, select options from the tabs that are displayed by selecting Document<br />

Defaults and Properties from the menu of the printer icon.<br />

● For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, select options from the tabs that are displayed by selecting<br />

Printing Preferences and Properties from the menu of the printer icon.<br />

● For Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 and Windows XP, options are also displayed on the<br />

Color Management tab.<br />

Tab<br />

Tab


3.3.4 Using On-line Help<br />

3.3 Printing Features<br />

Explanation of the printer driver options and the basic printing process are found<br />

in the On-line Help.<br />

To view explanation of each option<br />

On the active properties dialog box of the printer driver, click the button on<br />

the top of the right corner of the window, and after the cursor has changed to<br />

click on the desired option.<br />

,<br />

To view basic process of printing<br />

On the active properties dialog box of the printer driver, click the Help button on<br />

the bottom right corner of the window to display a Help window which explains<br />

the displayed screen. Click the Contents button at the top left corner of the Help<br />

window to display a contents of the printing process.<br />

By double-clicking the title of the desired process, you will see the explanation.<br />

You can select Help when the tab unique to PCL printer driver is displayed.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

49


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

50<br />

3.4<br />

Installing/Uninstalling the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

This section describes the procedure for installing and uninstalling the printer drivers.<br />

Two methods of installation are described here, one for a local printer and the other for a<br />

network printer.<br />

If you have installed an earlier version of the printer driver, uninstall it first by following the<br />

procedure in “3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 54) before installing the new version.<br />

3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Procedure<br />

Local printer refers to a printer that is directly connected to your computer.<br />

1 Start Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,<br />

Windows 2000 or Windows XP.<br />

For this example, we will install the C400 PCL 6 printer driver on the Windows 98 OS.<br />

2 Click Start, point to Settings, and click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

3 In the <strong>Printer</strong>s window, double-click Add <strong>Printer</strong>.<br />

4 Click Next.


5 Select Local printer and click Next.<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

6 Insert the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM in your CD-<br />

ROM drive.<br />

7 Click Have Disk.<br />

The Install From Disk dialog box appears.<br />

8 Enter “Drive Name:\English\DC_C400\Win98_Me\PCL6” in the “Copy<br />

manufacturer’s files from:” box and click OK.<br />

In this guide, we have used “E:” as the CD-ROM drive. If you are using<br />

a different drive for the CD-ROM, specify accordingly.<br />

● Click the Browse button to specify a folder in the CD-ROM.<br />

● Enter “DC_C320” instead of “DC_C400” if you are installing the C320 printer driver.<br />

● Enter “DC_C240” instead of “DC_C400” if you are installing the C240 printer driver.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

51


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

52<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

9 Select your printer model from the <strong>Printer</strong>s list and click Next.<br />

10 Select the port that you are using and click Next.<br />

11 Type a name for the printer, specify whether you want to use the printer<br />

as the default printer, then click Next.


3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

12 Specify whether you want to print a test page, then click Finish.<br />

Installation begins.<br />

3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Procedure<br />

Network printer refers to a printer that is connected to your computer through a<br />

network.<br />

1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 50). Select Network<br />

printer instead of Local printer to share this machine on the network<br />

and then click Next.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

53


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

54<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

2 Specify the path to the machine in the “Network path or gueue name:”<br />

box and click Next.<br />

● Click the Browse button to specify the network path of the machine.<br />

● If you do not know the network address of the network printer, contact with your system administrator.<br />

3 Follow steps 11 to 12 of “3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 50) to complete<br />

the installation procedure.<br />

3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

Procedure<br />

To uninstall the alternate drivers downloaded using the Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard dialog box at the client<br />

computer, open the <strong>Printer</strong>s window and erase the applicable printer icons.<br />

1 Click Start, point to Settings, and click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

For this example, we will uninstall the C400 PCL 6 driver on the Windows 98 OS.<br />

2 Select the printer icon.<br />

3 Select Delete from the File menu.


■For Windows 95/98, Me, and Windows NT<br />

4 In the <strong>Printer</strong>s dialog box, click Yes.<br />

5 Click Yes.<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

■For Windows 2000/XP<br />

4 Select Server Properties from the File menu.<br />

5 Click the Driver tab.<br />

6 Select the printer driver you want to remove and click Remove.<br />

7 Click Yes.<br />

8 Restart the OS.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

55


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

56<br />

3.5<br />

Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line<br />

When the machine is switched to off-line, it cannot receive data. Data being received will be<br />

interrupted and will not be printed.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 On the control panel, press Machine Status.<br />

The Machine Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Print Mode.<br />

<br />

The Print Mode screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Off-line.<br />

Print Mode<br />

4 Select Close.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Off-line<br />

On-line<br />

Close<br />

PCL Emulation HP-GL2 Emulation


3.6<br />

Canceling Printing/<br />

Checking Job Status<br />

To cancel printing, delete the print instruction on the computer first. If the print instruction<br />

cannot be deleted from the computer, delete it from this machine.<br />

You can check the status of print jobs from the computer.<br />

This section describes the different processes.<br />

3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer<br />

This section explains how to canceling print instructions from the computer.<br />

Canceling from Windows<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to cancel print instruction from Windows is as follows:<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

2 Open the icon of the printer model.<br />

3 In the windows displayed, click any document name and then press<br />

Delete on the keyboard.<br />

Canceling from CentreWare Internet Services<br />

You can use CentreWare Internet Services to cancel printing from the computer.<br />

For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From<br />

Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

57


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

58<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong><br />

The process to cancel printing from this machine is as follows:<br />

Canceling jobs in process<br />

Procedure<br />

If neither of the following two screens is displayed, see the procedure on the next<br />

page, “ Canceling jobs inside the machine” (P. 59).<br />

1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

The job processing will be discontinued.<br />

Canceling jobs in the midst of printing<br />

Procedure<br />

Processing data...<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />

: akira. endo<br />

: Host1<br />

: document<br />

1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

Printing in progress...<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />

: akira. endo<br />

: Host1<br />

: document<br />

Quantity : 2 / 4<br />

Pages : 2 / 10<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />

Stop<br />

Stop<br />

Close<br />

Close


3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

2 To stop printing, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />

the following screen. However, the page in the midst of printing will be<br />

printed.<br />

To continue printing, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on the<br />

screen.<br />

Canceling jobs inside the machine<br />

Procedure<br />

Ready to print.<br />

Touch Start to resume printing or Stop to cancel the job.<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />

: akira. endo<br />

: Host1<br />

: document<br />

Quantity : 2 / 4<br />

Pages : 2 / 10<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

The process to cancel print jobs received by the machine is as follows. Through<br />

this procedure, you can interrupt the receiving of data and empty the buffer.<br />

Buffer is the location to store data sent from the client.<br />

You can also execute and print all jobs in the machine. For details, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting<br />

Data Wait Documents” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Current and Pending Jobs.<br />

A list of jobs in process or waiting will be displayed.<br />

Stop<br />

Start<br />

Close<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />

00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

59


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

60<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

3 Select the job that you want to delete.<br />

The job status will be displayed.<br />

4 Select Stop.<br />

The job processing will be discontinued.<br />

5 Select Close.<br />

Repeat steps 2 to 5 if you have other jobs to delete.<br />

3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction<br />

The procedure to check the job status of print instruction is as follows:<br />

Using Windows<br />

Procedure<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />

00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />

: <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

: (CentreWare)<br />

: document<br />

Quantity :<br />

Pages :<br />

2 A4<br />

1 Sided<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

0/5<br />

120/120<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00010 Close<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

2 Open the icon of the printer model.<br />

Stop<br />

Promote Job


3 Check Status in the displayed window.<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

You can also use CentreWare Internet Services to check job status of print<br />

instruction in the machine.<br />

For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From<br />

Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

Using <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Procedure<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select either Current and Pending Jobs or Completed<br />

Jobs.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

A list of jobs will be displayed.<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

61


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

62<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

3 Check the job status.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />

00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

For example, if a job in waiting is selected, the following screen will be displayed.<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00010 Close<br />

: <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

: (CentreWare)<br />

: document<br />

Quantity :<br />

Pages<br />

2 A4<br />

1 Sided<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

:<br />

0 / 5<br />

100 /120<br />

4 After checking, press Features on the control panel.<br />

Stop<br />

Promote Job


4Special Printing<br />

4.1 Printing Special Papers.................................................................... 64<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size................................................... 66<br />

4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size ............................ 66<br />

4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size.................................... 68<br />

4.3 Secure Print ..................................................................................... 70<br />

4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs ................................................. 70<br />

4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs ................................................ 72<br />

4.4 Sample Print .................................................................................... 77<br />

4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs ................................................ 77<br />

4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs ............................................... 78<br />

4.5 Delayed Print.................................................................................... 83<br />

4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs ............................................... 83<br />

4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs .............................................. 85<br />

4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing................................................... 89<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing.................................................................................. 91<br />

4.7.1 System Environment......................................................... 91<br />

4.7.2 Sending E-mail ................................................................. 95<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail.................................................................. 97<br />

4.8.1 System Environment......................................................... 97<br />

4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail............................................................ 99<br />

4.9 Adding Banner Sheet for Printing .................................................. 101<br />

4.10 File Upload Printing........................................................................ 102


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

64<br />

4.1<br />

Printing Special Papers<br />

This section describes how to print special papers. The following special papers can be<br />

printed:<br />

● Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m 2 )<br />

● Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m 2 ) – Side 2<br />

● Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m 2 )<br />

● Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m 2 ) – Side 2<br />

● Transparency<br />

● Lightweight (55-63 g/m 2 )<br />

● Labels<br />

● Custom 1-5<br />

Use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) when printing these special papers.<br />

Display the Paper/Output tab to configure these paper supply settings.<br />

This will describe Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />

using other OS.<br />

● When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent this, remove about 20<br />

sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

● Use only labels exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine breakdown.<br />

● Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ. See the<br />

manual of the application program used.<br />

● When loading transparencies in tray 5 (Bypass Tray), you are recommended to load in the portrait orientation.<br />

● For details on using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), see “3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40).<br />

“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on paper types suitable or<br />

unsuitable for copying and loading in each tray.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Load special paper in tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

3 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

4 Click the Paper/Output tab.


4.1 Printing Special Papers<br />

5 From the Paper Source drop-down list box, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />

6 Select the paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list box.<br />

7 Click OK to start printing.<br />

● When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent this, remove<br />

about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

● Use only labels exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine<br />

breakdown.<br />

5<br />

6<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

65


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

66<br />

4.2<br />

Printing Non-Standard<br />

Paper Size<br />

This section describes how to print non-standard paper size. To print non-standard paper<br />

size, you have to customize the paper size on the printer driver first.<br />

Once the non-standard paper size has been customized, you can select it from Paper Size<br />

and Output Size on the Paper/Output tab. Use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) for printing.<br />

You can customize up to five paper sizes with a separate name for each size. For sizes in<br />

millimeters, you can enter in units of 0.1 mm and between 100.0 – 305.0 mm for the short<br />

edge, 140.0 – 482.6 mm for the long edge; and for sizes in inches, in units of 0.01 inch and<br />

between 3.94 – 12.01 inch for the short edge, 5.51 – 19.00 inch for the long edge.<br />

For the name of the customized size, you can enter up to 14 characters.<br />

For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, only Administrators can change the setting. All other users can<br />

only check the contents.<br />

As local printer uses the client’s form database, configuring settings on the Custom Paper Size dialog box on<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP will affect other printers of the client. For network printer, using<br />

form database of the server with print queue will also affect the shared printer on the same network of other clients.<br />

For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, defining customized paper sizes for each printer icon will not affect<br />

settings of other printer on the client. For network printer, defining customized paper sizes for each printer icon will<br />

also not affect the shared printer on the same network of other clients.<br />

4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

Procedure<br />

Customize non-standard paper size on the Custom Paper Size dialog box.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Configuration tab.


3 Click Custom Paper Size.<br />

The Custom Paper Size dialog box is displayed.<br />

4 Select the desired paper size from the Details list box.<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

5 In the Change Setting For group, specify Short Edge and Long Edge.<br />

You can either enter the value with keyboard or use the buttons on the screen.<br />

Short Edge cannot be longer than Long Edge. Conversely, Long Edge cannot be shorter than Short<br />

Edge.<br />

6 To name the paper size, check the Name the Paper Size check box,<br />

and then enter the name at Name.<br />

You can enter up to 14 characters for the name.<br />

7 If necessary, repeat steps 4 to 6 to set the paper size.<br />

8 Click OK.<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

67


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

68<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

9 Click OK on the Configuration tab.<br />

4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to print non-standard paper size is as follows. Use tray 5 (Bypass<br />

Tray) for printing.<br />

“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on using tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

1 Load the non-standard paper size in tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

3 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

4 Click the Paper/Output tab.


4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

5 From the Paper Source drop-down list box, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />

6 Select the paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list box.<br />

7 From the Output Size drop-down list box, select the needed non-standard<br />

paper size.<br />

8 Click OK to start printing.<br />

6 5<br />

7<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

69


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

70<br />

4.3<br />

Secure Print<br />

You can add a password to your print data on the computer, send it to the machine for temporary<br />

storing; and then print out the data using the control panel on the machine. This feature<br />

is known as Secure Print. You can also save print data in the machine without a<br />

password and print frequently-used data directly from the machine without having to send<br />

print instruction from the client.<br />

You need to set the user name and password before printing.<br />

Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />

the hard disk is full.<br />

4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs<br />

Procedure<br />

To use the Secure Print feature, you need to set the user name and password.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Paper/Output tab.


3 Select Secure Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Secure Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

4 Enter the user ID within 24 characters at the Secure/Sample Print <strong>User</strong><br />

ID text box.<br />

The user ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID on the Secure Print screen on the touch panel<br />

display of the machine. You can register the same user ID more than once if it is used with different<br />

passwords.<br />

5 When password is set, enter a password of four-digits of less in the<br />

Password text box and the Confirm Password text box.<br />

6 Click OK.<br />

3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

71


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

72<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs<br />

This section describes how to print Secure Print jobs.<br />

First, set and send the Secure Print job at the client. Then, execute the print<br />

instruction at the machine to print out the data.<br />

You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />

procedure of executing print instruction at the machine.<br />

At the computer<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click the Paper/Output tab and select Secure Print from the Job Type<br />

drop-down list box.<br />

The Secure Print Settings dialog box is displayed.<br />

If necessary, click the Secure Print button and change the settings.<br />

4


4 Confirm the <strong>User</strong> ID and Password.<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

5 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box,select either Enter Document<br />

Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />

If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />

Name text box.<br />

For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />

if more than that are entered.<br />

The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Secure Print screen<br />

on the touch panel display of the machine.<br />

6 Click OK.<br />

7 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

At the machine<br />

Procedure<br />

This section describes the procedure to output print data stored inside the<br />

machine.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

4<br />

5<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

73


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

74<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Secure Print.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

The Secure Print screen is displayed and the user ID specified on the printer driver will be displayed.<br />

3 Select the user ID which you want to check, followed by Document<br />

List.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />

the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the ID number at Go to to specify the<br />

required ID directly.<br />

Once the user ID has been selected, the saved number will be displayed at No. of Docs. on the bottom<br />

right of the screen.<br />

Secure Print<br />

001 <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro 002 <strong>Fuji</strong> Hanako<br />

003 Endo<br />

004 Imai<br />

005 Fukada<br />

006 Motohashi<br />

Refresh<br />

Go to<br />

(001-200)<br />

Document List<br />

● Selecting the Refresh button will display the latest information.<br />

● If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password set<br />

on the printer driver and then select the Confirm button.<br />

● If you have forgotten the password, you can display the document saved in the System Administration<br />

Mode. For details on System Administration Mode, see “Chapter 5 System Administration<br />

Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Close


4.3 Secure Print<br />

4 In the password entry screen, enter the same password as the one<br />

entered in the printer driver, then click Confirm.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Password<br />

The information of the document saved in the specified user ID will be displayed under Document<br />

Name, Stored Date and Pages. The name displayed in Document Name will be the document name set<br />

on the printer driver.<br />

5 Select the document to be printed, followed by Print.<br />

Selecting the Select All button will select all the documents. Selecting it again to deselect. To delete<br />

document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

Confirm<br />

Cancel<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Refresh<br />

Close<br />

No. Document Name Stored Date Pages No.of Docs. : 2<br />

1 Secure Print<br />

2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22<br />

2 Dialog SOD<br />

2001/10/8 7:30 PM 5<br />

Select All<br />

6 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />

selection.<br />

■If Print is selected:<br />

Selecting the Cancel button will return you to the screen from step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

No. The following document(s)s will be printed.<br />

1<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID<br />

Doc.Name<br />

:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

2001/10/7 8:10 AM<br />

:Secure Print 1<br />

2 Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 2001/10/8 PM 7:30 PM<br />

Select to delete or save the document after printing.<br />

Print and<br />

Delete<br />

Print and<br />

Save<br />

22<br />

5<br />

Refresh<br />

Cancel<br />

Print<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

75


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

76<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

■If Delete is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return you to the screen from step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

The following document will be deleted.<br />

1<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID<br />

Doc. Name<br />

:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

2001/10/7 8:10 AM<br />

:Dialog SOD<br />

2 Stored Date<br />

Are you sure?<br />

:2001/10/8 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 7:30 PM<br />

Refresh<br />

Deleting all the documents of a user ID will delete the user ID.<br />

7 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

22<br />

5<br />

Yes No<br />

Close


4.4<br />

Sample Print<br />

When printing multiple copies, you can print out only the first set to check the printing result<br />

first before printing the remaining copies from the printer control panel. This feature is<br />

known as Sample Print.<br />

You need to set the user name before printing.<br />

Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />

the hard disk is full.<br />

4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs<br />

Procedure<br />

To use the Sample Print feature, you need to set the user name.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

77


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

78<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

3 Select Sample Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Sample Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />

4 Enter the user ID within 24 characters at the <strong>User</strong> ID text box.<br />

The user ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID on the Sample Print screen on the touch<br />

panel display of the machine.<br />

5 Click OK.<br />

4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs<br />

This section describes how to print Sample Print jobs.<br />

First, set and send the Sample Print job at the client. Then, execute the print<br />

instruction at the machine to print out the remaining data.<br />

You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />

procedure of executing print instruction at the machine.<br />

At the computer<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

3


Procedure<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click the Paper/Output tab and set Copies to at least 2.<br />

4 Select Sample Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Sample Print Settings dialog box is displayed.<br />

If necessary, click the Sample Print button and change the settings.<br />

5 Confirm <strong>User</strong> ID.<br />

5<br />

6<br />

4<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

79


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

80<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

6 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box, select either Enter Document<br />

Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />

If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />

Name text box.<br />

For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />

if more than that are entered.<br />

The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Sample Print screen<br />

on the touch panel display of the machine.<br />

7 Click OK.<br />

8 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

At the machine<br />

Procedure<br />

The following describes the procedure to output the remaining print data stored<br />

inside the machine.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Sample Print.<br />

Job Management<br />

Secure Print Sample Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Delayed Print<br />

The Sample Print screen is displayed and the user ID specified on the printer driver will be displayed.


4.4 Sample Print<br />

3 Select the user ID which you want to check, followed by Document<br />

List.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />

the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the ID number at Go to to specify the<br />

required ID directly.<br />

Once the user ID has been selected, the saved number will be displayed at No. of Docs. on the bottom<br />

right of the screen.<br />

Selecting the Refresh button will display the latest information.<br />

Sample Print<br />

001 <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro 002 <strong>Fuji</strong> Hanako<br />

003 Endo<br />

004 Imai<br />

005 Fukada<br />

006 Motohashi<br />

The information of the document saved in the specified user ID will be displayed under Doc. Name,<br />

Stored Date and Pages. The name displayed in Doc. Name will be the document name set on the<br />

printer driver.<br />

4 Select the document to be printed, followed by Print.<br />

Selecting the Select All button will select all the documents. Selecting it again to deselect. To delete<br />

document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

No. Doc. Name Stored Date Pages<br />

1 Planning Paper 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 52<br />

2 Goods Guidance 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 35<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

Refresh<br />

Refresh<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001-200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs. : 2<br />

Select All<br />

Print<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No. of Docs. : 2<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

81


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

82<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

5 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />

selection.<br />

■If Print is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return you to the screen of step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

The following documents will be deleted after printed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Doc. Name :Goods Guidance<br />

Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM<br />

Are you sure?<br />

Yes No<br />

Refresh<br />

■If Delete is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return you to the screen of step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

The following document(s) will be deleted.<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Doc. Name :Goods Guidance<br />

Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM<br />

Are you sure?<br />

Yes No<br />

Refresh<br />

Deleting all the documents of an user ID will delete the user ID.<br />

6 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

Close


4.5<br />

Delayed Print<br />

You can start the print job at the time set in advance. You can also start printing before<br />

reaching the time using the control panel. This feature is known as Delayed Print.<br />

You need to set the user name before printing.<br />

Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />

the hard disk is full.<br />

4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs<br />

Procedure<br />

To use the Delayed Print feature, you need to set the user name.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

83


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

84<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

3 Select Delayed Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Delayed Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />

4 Enter the time on a 24-hour basis to start printing at the Time box.<br />

5 Click OK.


4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

This section describes how to print Delayed Print jobs.<br />

First, set and send the Delayed Print job at the client. When printing the delayed<br />

print jobs before being time to be set, use the control panel on the machine.<br />

You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />

procedure of executing print instruction at the printer.<br />

At the computer<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

4 Select Delayed Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Delayed Print dialog box is displayed.<br />

If necessary, click the Delayed Print button and change the settings.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

85


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

86<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

5 Confirm the time at the Time box.<br />

6 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box, select either Enter Document<br />

Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />

If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />

Name text box.<br />

For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />

if more than that are entered.<br />

The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Delayed Print screen<br />

on the touch panel display of the printer.<br />

7 Click OK.<br />

8 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

At the printer<br />

Procedure<br />

The following describes the procedure to output the remaining print data stored<br />

inside the printer forcibely before the time specified on the computer driver will<br />

come.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.


4.5 Delayed Print<br />

2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Delayed Print.<br />

Job Management<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

The Delayed Print screen is displayed and the Time specified on the printer driver is displayed.<br />

3 Select the document to be printed before the specified time, followed by<br />

Print.<br />

To delete document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

Delayed Print<br />

No. Document Name Print Time Pages<br />

1 Planning Paper 10:00 AM<br />

52<br />

2 Goods Guidance 11:50 AM<br />

35<br />

3 <strong>User</strong>s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8:36 PM 620<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Refresh<br />

Print<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No. of Docs: 3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

87


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

88<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

4 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />

selection.<br />

■If Print is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of Step 4.<br />

Delayed Print<br />

Refresh<br />

The following document(s) will be deleted after printing.<br />

Doc. Name :Planning Paper<br />

Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM)<br />

<strong>User</strong> Name :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Host Name :Alpha<br />

The job will not print at the programmed time. Do you want to print now?<br />

Yes No<br />

■If Delete is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of Step 4.<br />

Delayed Print<br />

The following document(s) will be deleted.<br />

Doc. Name :Planning Paper<br />

Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM)<br />

<strong>User</strong> Name<br />

Host Name<br />

Are you sure?<br />

:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

:Alpha<br />

Yes No<br />

Refresh<br />

5 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

Close


4.6<br />

Expanding Print Areas for<br />

Printing<br />

By changing the print area and the margins, you can expand the print area for printing.<br />

Depending on the application program, you might not obtain the desired print result.<br />

“A.2 Printable Area” (P. 233) for details on the printable areas.<br />

Display the Print Areas/Margin dialog box to configure the print settings.<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />

using other OS.<br />

● Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ. See the<br />

manual of the application program used.<br />

● <strong>User</strong>s who are considered as Guests, Replicator or <strong>User</strong>s of Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0<br />

cannot configure the margin settings.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click Printable Area on the Paper/Output tab.<br />

The Printable Area dialog box is displayed.<br />

3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

89


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

90<br />

4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing<br />

4 Click Extended.<br />

5 Click OK.<br />

6 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

4


4.7<br />

E-mail Printing<br />

You can send an e-mail with a TIFF or PDF document attached, from the computer to the<br />

machine. Upon receiving the mail, the machine will print it out automatically. This feature is<br />

known as “E-mail Printing”.<br />

In order to print PDF document, you need the PostScript Software Kit (option).<br />

4.7.1 System Environment<br />

The following settings have to be configured in order to use the E-mail Printing<br />

feature. Check with your system administrator or network administrator on<br />

whether these settings have been configured.<br />

Network environment<br />

Register the user account.<br />

Mail Print environment<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services, set the Port Status, Machine E-mail<br />

Address, TCP/IP, and mail server settings.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

91


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

92<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Properties.<br />

“5.4 Activating” (P. 113) for details on activating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

2 Do the settings for the items shown in the table below.<br />

Item in the<br />

frame<br />

Machine<br />

Details<br />

Item Description Value<br />

Administrator<br />

E-mail<br />

Address<br />

Machine Email<br />

Address<br />

Sets the administrator’s e-mail<br />

address.<br />

Sets the e-mail address of this<br />

machine. This address is displayed<br />

at the From box on e-mail.<br />

● When receiving E-Mail via SMTP<br />

An alias cannot be set. You can set<br />

any name for the account (on the<br />

left side of @). Set the address<br />

section (on the right side of @),<br />

with the combination of the host<br />

name and domain name.<br />

<br />

ifax@dcc400.fujixerox.co.jp<br />

Account name: ifax<br />

Host name: dcc400<br />

Domain Name: fujixerox.co.jp<br />

Enter an<br />

address<br />

within 127<br />

characters.<br />

Settings to<br />

define based<br />

on the protocol<br />

SMTP POP3


Item in the<br />

frame<br />

Machine<br />

Details<br />

Item Description Value<br />

Machine Email<br />

Address<br />

● When receiving E-mails via POP3<br />

Enter the POP user name (on the<br />

left side of @) and incoming POP3<br />

mail server name in the address<br />

section (on the right side of @).<br />

You can set an alias, such as<br />

ifax@fujixerox.co.jp.<br />

<br />

ifax@mb1.abc.fujixerox.co.jp<br />

Account name: ifax<br />

Enter an<br />

address<br />

within 127<br />

characters.<br />

Port Status Receive E-mail<br />

Send E-mail<br />

Select the check box.<br />

TCP/IP under Host Name Sets the host name of this machine. Enter an<br />

Protocol Set-<br />

address<br />

tings<br />

within 32<br />

characters.<br />

Get DNS Select the check box if you want to<br />

Address get the DNS server address automatically<br />

from the DHCP server.<br />

DNS<br />

Address1-3<br />

Domain<br />

Name<br />

Enter the DNS server address. xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />

xxx<br />

Enter the DNS domain name. Enter an<br />

address<br />

within 255<br />

characters.<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

Settings to<br />

define based<br />

on the protocol<br />

SMTP POP3<br />

: Must set<br />

— : No need to set<br />

3 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings, and then on the<br />

displayed screen, click Reboot.<br />

4 Configure the setting of the items in the following table to match the Email<br />

Printing environment.<br />

—<br />

—<br />

—<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

93


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

94<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

Item in the<br />

frame<br />

E-mail under<br />

Protocol Settings<br />

Item Description Value<br />

Receiving<br />

Protocol<br />

Print Mail<br />

Headers and<br />

Contents<br />

POP3 Server<br />

Address<br />

POP3 Server<br />

Check Interval<br />

POP <strong>User</strong><br />

Name<br />

POP <strong>User</strong><br />

Password<br />

STMP SendingAuthentication<br />

STMP Server<br />

Address<br />

Sets how the mail is to be received to<br />

match your environment.<br />

Sets the contents to be printed when<br />

printing both the received mail and<br />

the header of the e-mail. Select All<br />

Headers and Contents when you<br />

want to print all items of the email.<br />

Sets the POP3 server address for<br />

receiving the mail.<br />

Sets the interval to check mail in the<br />

POP3 server.<br />

Sets the user name for connecting to<br />

the POP3 server. Only one user can<br />

be set.<br />

Sets the password for each user<br />

name and enter the same password<br />

again at the Confirm Password box.<br />

Allows you to confirm the user at the<br />

POP server before sending e-mails<br />

to the SMTP server. Check valid in<br />

the checkbox.<br />

*SMTP,<br />

POP3<br />

*Basic<br />

Headers<br />

and Contents,<br />

None,<br />

Based on<br />

Comment,<br />

All Headers<br />

and Contents<br />

Up to 128<br />

characters<br />

can be<br />

entered,<br />

including “.”<br />

(full stop)<br />

and “-”<br />

(hyphen).<br />

1 to 120<br />

minutes<br />

*10 minutes<br />

Enter each<br />

name within<br />

64 characters.<br />

Enter a<br />

password<br />

within 64<br />

characters.<br />

Invalid*<br />

Valid<br />

Set the SMTP server address. Up to 128<br />

characters can<br />

be entered,<br />

including “.”<br />

and “-”.<br />

* : default values<br />

Settings to<br />

define based<br />

on the protocol<br />

SMTP POP3<br />

—<br />

—<br />

—<br />

—<br />

: Must set<br />

— : No need to set


4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

5 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings, and then on the<br />

displayed screen, click Reboot.<br />

4.7.2 Sending E-mail<br />

Procedure<br />

This section describes how to send mails to the machine from the computer<br />

using Outlook Express as an example.<br />

1 Using your e-mail software, create a mail and then attach a TIFF or<br />

PDF document, if available.<br />

● If the file format of the attached document is not “.tif” nor “.pdf”, you might not be able to print<br />

correctly.<br />

● Up to 31 documents can be attached.<br />

2 Enter the e-mail address of the receiving machine.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

95


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

96<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

3 Send the e-mail.<br />

After the e-mail has been received at the machine, it will be automatically printed.<br />

The e-mail itself and the attached document will be printed at the machine based on the following settings:<br />

● The e-mail itself:<br />

Default values of the PCL printer driver<br />

● The attached TIFF document:<br />

Default values of the logical printer settings for TIFF of the Emulation Settings of CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

● The attached PDF document:<br />

Default values of the logical printer settings for PostScript of the Emulation Settings of CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.


4.8<br />

Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

You can configure an e-mail to be sent to the computer to notify that a job has ended.<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />

using other OS.<br />

4.8.1 System Environment<br />

The following settings have to be configured in order to use the Mail Notification<br />

feature. Check with your system administrator or network administrator on<br />

whether these settings have been configured.<br />

Network Environment and Mail Environment Settings<br />

● Register the user account.<br />

● Set the Mail Environment.<br />

“4.7 E-mail Printing” (P. 91) for details on Setting Mail Environment.<br />

Mail Notification Environment Setting<br />

Procedure<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services, configure the setting for using the Mail<br />

Notification feature.<br />

1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Properties.<br />

“5.4 Activating” (P. 113) for details on activating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

97


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

98<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

2 From the left frame of the screen displayed, select Port Status.<br />

3 Check the Enable check box of Mail Notice.<br />

4 Click Apply New Settings.<br />

If a message prompts for the user name and password, enter these items and then click OK. If a message<br />

prompts for the machine to be reboot, switch off the power of the machine and then on again.


4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

5 If the machine has been reboot, check that it has been activated and<br />

then select Mail Notice Settings from the left frame.<br />

If necessary, configure setting for other items.<br />

6 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings. If a message<br />

prompts for the user name and password, enter these items and then<br />

click OK. If a message prompts for the machine to be reboot, switch off<br />

the power of the machine and then on again.<br />

4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Configuration tab.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

99


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

100<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

3 Select Notify Job End by E-mail from the Print Features list box.<br />

4 Select On from the Notify Job End by E-mail drop-down list box.<br />

5 Enter an e-mail address at the Mail Address box.<br />

6 Click OK.


4.9<br />

Adding Banner Sheet for<br />

Printing<br />

During printing, you can add paper used for sorting/classifying (banner sheet) to differentiate<br />

a printed sheet from the rest.<br />

You can configure the setting for the banner sheet on this machine.<br />

● Banner sheets are not stapled when the staple feature has been set.<br />

● The number of banner sheet printed will be added to the meter.<br />

“5.7.2 Others (Print Mode Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on setting banner<br />

sheet.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

101


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

102<br />

4.10<br />

File Upload Printing<br />

You can print a TIFF file or a PDF file by uploading files to the machine using a browser.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Services.<br />

“5.4 Activating” for details on actibating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

2 Click Browse in the File Name group.<br />

The Choose file dialog box appears.<br />

3 In the Choose file dialog box, specify a file on the computer.<br />

4 If necessary, set the other settings in the window.


5 Click Start to start printing.<br />

4.10 File Upload Printing<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

103


5Configuring From<br />

Computer (CentreWare<br />

Internet Services)<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services ............................................. 106<br />

5.1.1 Introduction..................................................................... 106<br />

5.1.2 Structure Screen............................................................. 107<br />

5.1.3 System Structure ............................................................ 108<br />

5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers................................................. 109<br />

5.2 Configuring Browser ...................................................................... 110<br />

5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator.......................................... 110<br />

5.2.2 For Internet Explorer....................................................... 110<br />

5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number....................................... 111<br />

5.3 Configuring Machine...................................................................... 112<br />

5.4 Activating ....................................................................................... 113<br />

5.5 Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 114


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

106<br />

5.1<br />

5.1.1 Introduction<br />

About CentreWare Internet<br />

Services<br />

CentreWare Internet Services is a software that enables you to use a web<br />

browser to display the printer/job status or change the settings of this machine<br />

when it has been configured for use in TCP/IP environment.<br />

Among the items that can be set through the touch panel display for this machine<br />

to be used as a printer, you can use the Properties screen of this software to set<br />

items like system setting as well as the setting of each network port.<br />

“Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier)<br />

for details on items that can be set through the touch panel display.<br />

Depending on the item, some settings become effective only after rebooting (i.e. switching off/on the<br />

machine or defining the system setting using the printer control panel).<br />

The main features of each tab of CentreWare Internet Services are as follows:<br />

Tab Main Features<br />

● Services Allows you to configure settings and print documents stored in your<br />

computer.<br />

● Jobs Displays the job list/job history and deletes jobs.<br />

● Status Displays the host device status.<br />

● Displays the status of paper tray/output tray, as well as consumables<br />

like toner.<br />

● Properties Displays or configures the following items: machine details and date/<br />

time settings; configuration settings like memory and printer language;<br />

counter settings; paper trays setting; paper settings; save energy mode<br />

settings; fax list settings; mailbox settings; mail notice settings; Internet<br />

services settings; port status settings.<br />

● Sets every port.<br />

● Sets every protocol.<br />

● Sets emulation.<br />

● Sets memory.<br />

Maintenance ● Displays error history report.<br />

Support ● Displays support information.


5.1.2 Structure Screen<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />

The CentreWare Internet Services screen is made up of four frames (partitioned<br />

screens).<br />

There is a frame at the top and bottom of the window, that is as wide as the<br />

browser, as well as two between these, which are on the left and right. The contents<br />

displayed on each frame change according to the features used (Jobs, Status,<br />

Properties, Maintenance, Support).<br />

Clicking the Help button at the bottom frame will display the On-line Help file containing explanations<br />

on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Left frame<br />

Top frame<br />

The frame displayed at the top of the window. By default, a logo mark and the<br />

printer name will be displayed. Besides the logo mark and machine name, each<br />

feature page will display a link to the top page as well as tabs for moving to each<br />

feature.<br />

Bottom frame<br />

Top frame<br />

Right frame<br />

Bottom frame<br />

Usually, it displays the links to the Home Page of our company, the copyright<br />

screen and the Help file. The contents in this frame remain unchanged regardless<br />

of the page that is being displayed.<br />

Click the Help button to display the Help file for details on each of the features of<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

107


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

108<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />

Right and left frames<br />

The contents in these frames will change according to the features selected. The<br />

items that can be set as well as information on them will be displayed in these<br />

frames once a feature is selected.<br />

You can drag the line separating the left and right frames to change their size of these frames. The<br />

position of the line separating the top and bottom frames cannot be changed.<br />

5.1.3 System Structure<br />

To use CentreWare Internet Services, you need to activate an environment<br />

using TCP/IP and enable this software on the machine.


5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />

The OS and browsers that can be used for CentreWare Internet Services are as<br />

follows:<br />

Target OS<br />

● Microsoft Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2)<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition<br />

● Mac OS 8.0 or later<br />

Browsers<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows<br />

2000, Windows XP:<br />

● Netscape Communicator ver. 4.51 or later<br />

● Internet Explorer ver. 4.01SP2 or later<br />

■For Macintosh:<br />

● Netscape Communicator ver. 4.5 or later<br />

● Internet Explorer ver. 5.0 or later<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

109


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

110<br />

5.2<br />

Configuring Browser<br />

Before using CentreWare Internet Services, check the following settings for the browser to<br />

be used:<br />

5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Netscape Communicator 4.51 of Windows NT 4.0 as an example.<br />

1 From the Edit menu, select Preferences.<br />

2 From the Category tree, select Advanced.<br />

3 Click the sign on the left of Advanced.<br />

4 Click Cache under Advanced.<br />

5 Click Once per session or Every time for Document in cache is compared<br />

to document on network.<br />

6 Click OK.<br />

5.2.2 For Internet Explorer<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Internet Explorer 5.5 of Windows NT 4.0 as an example.<br />

1 Select Internet Options from the Display menu for version 4.x, and<br />

Internet Options from the Tools menu for version 5.x.<br />

2 Click Settings for Temporary Internet files on the General tab.<br />

3 For Check for newer versions of stored pages on the Settings tab,<br />

select either Every visit to the page or Every time you start Internet<br />

Explorer.<br />

4 Click OK.


5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number<br />

5.2 Configuring Browser<br />

You also need to check the proxy server setting and port number before using<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Proxy server setting<br />

When using CentreWare Internet Services, it is recommended to make direct<br />

connection without going through a proxy server.<br />

When connection has been made through a proxy server, it might take a long time to set the IP address<br />

using the browser and the screen might not be displayed. When this happens, you have to set the IP<br />

address at the browser without going through a proxy server. For details on how to define these settings,<br />

see the manual of the browser that you are using.<br />

Port number setting<br />

The default port number of CentreWare Internet Services is “80”. The port number<br />

can be changed on the Properties screen > Protocol Settings > HTTP. The<br />

port numbers that can be set are “80” or “8,000” to “9,999”.<br />

To enter the port number at the browser after it has been changed, you have to<br />

add a “:” after the IP address or Internet address before adding it.<br />

For example, specify the port number as follows after it has been defined as<br />

“8080”:<br />

http://IP address: 8080<br />

or<br />

http://Internet address: 8080<br />

The port number can be checked under the Communication Settings item on the System Settings List.<br />

For details on printing the System Settings List, see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

111


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

112<br />

5.3<br />

Configuring Machine<br />

To use CentreWare Internet Services, you have to set the following items using the touch<br />

panel display:<br />

● IP address and if necessary, subnet mask and gateway address<br />

● Internet Services to Enabled (default: Disabled)<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.


5.4 Activating<br />

This section describes the steps you have to carry out on the host device in order to use<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Activate the host device, and then the browser.<br />

2 Enter the IP address or host name of this machine at the address column<br />

of the browser, and then press Enter on the keyboard.<br />

Check with the system administrator on the IP address and host name to be entered.<br />

■Example of specifying IP address<br />

■Example of specifying host name<br />

When specifying a port number, add “:” after the address, followed by “80” (default port number).<br />

The CentreWare Internet Services screen will be displayed.<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

113


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

114<br />

5.5 Troubleshooting<br />

On the Jobs and Maintenance screens, the detailed status of the print jobs specified for<br />

each of the interface and on the printer control panel will be displayed.<br />

Cause Action<br />

Cannot connect to CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

The “Please wait” message is<br />

displayed throughout at the<br />

browser.<br />

Is the machine working properly?<br />

Check if the power of the machine is switched on.<br />

Is CentreWare Internet Services activated? Print out the System<br />

Settings List to check.<br />

Is the Internet address correctly entered?<br />

Check the Internet address again. If cannot be connected, enter the<br />

IP address to make connection.<br />

Is the proxy server being used?<br />

Depending on the proxy server, connections might not be possible.<br />

Without using the proxy server, configure either the browser setting<br />

to one without using proxy server or the address to be connected to<br />

one without using proxy server.<br />

Is the Ethernet cable properly connected?<br />

Check that the Ethernet cable of the computer and machine is properly<br />

connected.<br />

Just for a while as instructed.<br />

If nothing happens, try clicking the Refresh button of the browser. If<br />

nothing happens, check if the machine is working properly.<br />

The Refresh button is not working.<br />

Are you using the specified OS and browser?<br />

Selecting menu in the left frame<br />

does not change the right frame<br />

contents.<br />

See “5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services” (P. 106), and check if<br />

the OS and browser you are using can be used.<br />

The screen display is distorted. Change the window size of the browser.<br />

The latest information is not displayed.<br />

Click the Refresh button.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button does not change anything.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button will display in the<br />

browser, messages like “No<br />

data.” or “The server has<br />

returned ineffective or unrecognizable<br />

response.”<br />

Is the entered value correct?<br />

If the entered value is not a valid entry, it will change automatically to<br />

an entry within the limit.<br />

Are the user name and password correct?<br />

Enter the correct user name and password.<br />

Reboot the machine.


Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong>


1Setting <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment .................................................................... 118<br />

1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox ............................................. 118<br />

1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template ........................... 119<br />

1.2 Flow of Configuring Scanning ........................................................ 120<br />

1.3 Using Scan Features...................................................................... 121<br />

1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment .............................. 121<br />

1.3.2 Connecting Cable ........................................................... 121<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox ........................................................ 122<br />

1.4.1 Setting IP Address.......................................................... 122<br />

1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation) ........................ 122<br />

1.4.3 Creating Mailbox............................................................. 127<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template............................................... 133<br />

1.5.1 Setting IP Address.......................................................... 133<br />

1.5.2 Activating FTP Client ...................................................... 133<br />

1.6 Configuring Computer.................................................................... 138<br />

1.6.1 Using Mailbox ................................................................. 138<br />

1.6.2 Using Job Template ........................................................ 138<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility ............................................ 139<br />

1.7.1 Required Environment .................................................... 139<br />

1.7.2 Installation ...................................................................... 140<br />

1.7.3 Uninstallation .................................................................. 142


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 118<br />

1<br />

1.1<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

This machine has two types of scanner function:<br />

● <strong>Scanner</strong> function using mailbox<br />

● <strong>Scanner</strong> function using Job Template<br />

The following describes the summary of each scan feature.<br />

1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox<br />

The scanner function using mailbox is available in this machine when you connect<br />

it to a network environment using TCP/IP protocol.<br />

Scan the desired document as data using this machine and store it in the mailbox.<br />

The stored document can be retrieved from a computer connected to the<br />

network.<br />

Besides scanned documents, you can also retrieve from the mailbox, faxed documents<br />

received from other facsimile.


1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template<br />

Specify a file with configured conditions (known as Job Template) and scan the<br />

necessary document with this machine. The scanned document will be saved to<br />

the hard disk of this machine and then sent automatically to the computer<br />

(server) connected to the network. You need to use the optional CentreWare<br />

Scanning Services to create the Job Template.<br />

When using Job Template, only the necessary processes on this machine will be explained in this<br />

guide. Help for CentreWare Internet Services or the “CentreWare Scanning Services Installation<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>” for information on the operations that need to be done on the computer.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

119


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 120<br />

1<br />

1.2<br />

Flow of Configuring<br />

Scanning<br />

The flow of configuring the scanning functions is as follows:<br />

Before setting the scan features, check that this machine is connected to the network by network cable. For details on<br />

connecting to the network, see “Chapter 2 Setting up Network” (P. 25) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.


1.3<br />

Using Scan Features<br />

This section describes the essential environment for using the scan feature.<br />

1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment<br />

The essential conditions for scanning using either the mailbox or Job Template<br />

are as follows:<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on the target OS and system environment<br />

when using CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

Target OS<br />

● Microsoft Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2 and Service Pack<br />

3)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2 and Service Pack 3)<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition<br />

Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition, Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Terminal<br />

Services, Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server Terminal Services, and Windows XP Remote<br />

Desktop cannot be used as the target OS.<br />

Network<br />

This machine and the computer must be connected to a network and be able to<br />

communicate by TCP/IP protocol.<br />

1.3.2 Connecting Cable<br />

Connect this machine to a network using interface cable.<br />

For details on connecting interface cable, see “1.2 Connecting Interface Cable” (P. 10) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1<br />

121


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 122<br />

1<br />

1.4<br />

Configuring for Using<br />

Mailbox<br />

To scan with the mailbox, configure the following settings on this machine:<br />

● set IP address<br />

● activate the port for scanning (salutation)<br />

● create a mailbox for saving scanned documents<br />

1.4.1 Setting IP Address<br />

For details on setting IP address, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

If an IP address has already been set for the printing function, you do not need to<br />

do any setting here.<br />

1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation)<br />

This section describes the procedure to set the port for scanning (salutation) to<br />

Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode<br />

through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) for details on System Administration Mode.<br />

● “5.6.1 Port Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the ports that<br />

can be set.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

The following describes the procedure of using System Administration Mode as<br />

an example.


Procedure<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

123


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

124<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select Port Settings.<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

<br />

Scan Mode Settings


1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

6 Select to display the next screen, and check Current Settings for<br />

Salutation on the screen.<br />

If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting. Proceed to step 11.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

For the remaining steps, Salutation is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />

7 Select Salutation and then Change Settings.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

The Salutation screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />

Salutation<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Disabled<br />

The Salutation - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />

2/3<br />

2/3<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

125


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

126<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The Salutation screen is displayed.<br />

10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />

Close.<br />

Salutation<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Enabled<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

11 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

12 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Press the Features button on the control panel, and then on the screen, check that Scan is displayed on<br />

the Menu screen.<br />

<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


1.4.3 Creating Mailbox<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

This section describes how to create a mailbox to save scanned documents.<br />

You can use either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services to<br />

create a mailbox.<br />

You can retrieve documents in the mailbox to an application program from a<br />

computer using the scanner driver.<br />

Up to 200 mailboxes can be created and the settings or options that can be<br />

changed are as follows:<br />

● Mailbox Name<br />

Sets the name of the mailbox. Up to 10 characters can be used.<br />

● Password<br />

Sets the mailbox password within 20 digits. You can configure settings without<br />

the password. This password will be effective only if the System Administrator’s<br />

password has been enabled.<br />

● Check Password<br />

Sets whether to check password for every sending and retrieving of faxes in<br />

the mailbox when the password has been set.<br />

● Delete/Save Documents<br />

Sets whether to delete mailbox documents automatically after receiving or<br />

printing the documents.<br />

When the fax feature has been installed, the options available for setting will be displayed with Mailbox<br />

Options(Fax Doc.). For details on the contents of the options, see “9.6 Creating a Mailbox” in the<br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile).<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

127


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

128<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

Procedure<br />

The following describes the procedure of using the touch panel display as an<br />

example.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


3 Select Setup Menu.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Mailbox.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Mailbox<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

5 Select the preferred box, followed by Create/Delete.<br />

Mailbox not in use yet will be displayed as “(Not in Use)”.<br />

Mailbox<br />

No. Mailbox Name<br />

001 (Not in Use)<br />

002 (Not in Use)<br />

003 (Not in Use)<br />

004 (Not in Use)<br />

005 (Not in Use)<br />

The Mailbox – Assign Password screen is displayed.<br />

Mailbox - Assign Password<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

Password<br />

Cancel<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Create/Delete<br />

Save<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

129


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

130<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

6 Set the password.<br />

■When setting password<br />

1 Select On.<br />

2 Using the numeric keypad, enter a password within 20 characters, and<br />

then select Save.<br />

1<br />

The Mailbox xxx – Create/Delete screen is displayed. xxx refers to the mailbox<br />

number.<br />

The entered password will be displayed as “∗”. To correct a wrongly entered value, press the C button<br />

on the control panel, and then re-enter.<br />

Mailbox - Assign Password<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

■When not setting password<br />

Select Off and then Save.<br />

Password<br />

Cancel<br />

The Mailbox xxx – Create/Delete screen is displayed. xxx refers to the mailbox<br />

number.<br />

7 If necessary, configure the settings for Mailbox Name, Check Password<br />

and Delete/Save Documents. Select the option to be set, followed by<br />

Change Settings. Select Save once the settings are done.<br />

Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Mailbox Name<br />

(Not Set)<br />

2. Password<br />

On<br />

3. Check Password<br />

Always<br />

4. Delete/Save Documents Delete<br />

Save<br />

Close<br />

Delete Mailbox<br />

Change<br />

Settings


■Mailbox Name<br />

Sets the name of the mailbox. Up to 10 characters can be used.<br />

The display might differ according to the ROM versions.<br />

Alphanumeric<br />

Symbol<br />

a b c d e f g<br />

h j j k l m n<br />

o p q r s<br />

v w x<br />

Cancel<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

● Entering alphanumeric character: Select Alphanumeric and then the characters.<br />

Selecting Shift will change the display<br />

to capital or small letters.<br />

● Entering symbol: Select Symbol and then the character, followed<br />

by Save.<br />

● Entering space: Select Space.<br />

● Deleting one character: Select Backspace.<br />

■Check Password<br />

Sets whether to check password for every sending and retrieving of faxes in the<br />

mailbox when the password has been set.<br />

3. Check Password<br />

Save<br />

(Write)<br />

Print/Delete<br />

(Read)<br />

Always<br />

y z<br />

t u<br />

1 2<br />

4 5<br />

7 8<br />

● Save (Write): Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />

when selecting a mailbox.<br />

● Print/Delete (Read): Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />

when printing/deleting mailbox document.<br />

● Always: Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />

when processing both of the above actions.<br />

0<br />

3<br />

6<br />

9<br />

Cancel<br />

The user will be required to enter the password<br />

when certain operations are selected.<br />

In order for this feature to function, you need to<br />

set the System Administrator Password to On.<br />

If not, the user password entry screen will not be<br />

displayed.<br />

Save<br />

Backspace<br />

Space<br />

Shift<br />

Save<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

131


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

132<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

■Delete/Save Documents<br />

Sets whether to delete documents when they have been retrieved from the mailbox<br />

and printed.<br />

4. Delete/Save Documents<br />

Save<br />

Delete<br />

● Save: Select this to save the document and the document<br />

is not deleted.<br />

● Delete: Select this to delete the document.<br />

8 Check the selection on the Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete screen and<br />

then select Close.<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

Delete documents from the Mailbox once<br />

they have been retrieved by an external<br />

source or after printing.<br />

Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Items Current Setting<br />

1. Mailbox Name<br />

report<br />

2. Password<br />

On<br />

3. Check Password<br />

Always<br />

4. Delete/Save Documents Delete<br />

Cancel<br />

9 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

10 Select Close.<br />

The unit will exit the System Administration Mode.<br />

Save<br />

Close<br />

Delete Mailbox<br />

Change<br />

Settings


1.5<br />

Configuring for Using Job<br />

Template<br />

To scan with Job Template, configure the following settings on this machine:<br />

● set IP address.<br />

● activate FTP client for using Job Template.<br />

1.5.1 Setting IP Address<br />

For details on setting IP address, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

If an IP address has already been set for the printing function, you do not need to<br />

do any setting here.<br />

1.5.2 Activating FTP Client<br />

The following procedure describes how to set the FTP client for using Job Template<br />

to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode<br />

through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) for details on System Administration Mode.<br />

● “5.6.1 Port Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the ports that<br />

can be set.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

The following describes the procedure of using System Administration Mode as<br />

an example.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1<br />

133


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

134<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

Procedure<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select Port Settings.<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

<br />

Scan Mode Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

135


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

136<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

6 Select to display the next screen, and check Current Settings for<br />

FTP Client on the screen.<br />

If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting. Proceed to step 11.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

For the remaining steps, FTP Client is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />

7 Select FTP Client and then Change Settings.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

The FTP Client screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />

FTP Client<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Disabled<br />

The FTP Client - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />

2/3<br />

2/3<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The FTP Client screen is displayed.<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />

Close.<br />

FTP Client<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Enabled<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

11 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

12 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Press the Features button on the control panel, and then on the screen, check that Scan is displayed on<br />

the Menu screen.<br />

<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

137


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 138<br />

1<br />

1.6<br />

Configuring Computer<br />

You need to do the following settings on the computer to export the scanned document to<br />

the computer.<br />

● Using mailbox<br />

● Using Job Template<br />

1.6.1 Using Mailbox<br />

In order to retrieve scanned document, install the scanner driver on the computer.<br />

For details on the operating environment of the scanner driver and the installation<br />

method, see “1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility” (P. 139).<br />

1.6.2 Using Job Template<br />

For CentreWare Scanning Services<br />

For details on the operating environment of the optional CentreWare Scanning<br />

Services and the installation method, refer to CentreWare Scanning Services<br />

Installation <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

For CentreWare Internet Services<br />

The following settings are necessary to scan by using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● FTP server<br />

Register a user account that can be accessed from the client PC.<br />

● Client PC<br />

Set up the client PC so that it can use TCP/IP.<br />

● Creating a job template and setting the FTP destination (repository)<br />

CentreWare Internet Services help for details on how to create job templates and how to set the FTP<br />

destination (repository). You can display help by selecting Job Templates in the CentreWare Internet<br />

Services screen and then clicking on help.<br />

You can also enable the Cookie setting on the Web.


1.7<br />

Installing the Network<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility is the software which allows you to access stored data in the mailbox<br />

from a personal computer. This section describes the installation and uninstallation of<br />

the network scanner utility using the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM.<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on the operating environment of CentreWare Scanning<br />

Services (option) and the installation method.<br />

1.7.1 Required Environment<br />

To install the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> utility, a personal computer must meet all the following<br />

requirements:<br />

■Target Operation System<br />

The following operation systems are compatible with the utility:<br />

● Microsoft ® Windows ® 95/Windows ® 98/Windows ® Me operating system<br />

● Microsoft ® Windows NT ® operating system Version 4.0/Windows ® 2000/<br />

Windows ® XP operating system<br />

Windows NT 4.0 Server TSE (Terminal Server Edition) and Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server<br />

Terminal Service are not compatible with this feature.<br />

■Personal Computer<br />

The target computer must meet all the following requirements:<br />

● Running i486DX4/100 MHz processor or above (Pentium 100 MHz or above is<br />

recommended)<br />

● 32 Mbyte memory or more<br />

● 40 Mbyte or more of free hard disk space (not including the space for storing<br />

scanned data)<br />

■Network<br />

A personal computer has to be connected to a network and be able to communicate<br />

with the TCP/IP protocol.<br />

See the manuals of the respective OS to confirm and add protocol setting on the computer.<br />

■Target Application Software<br />

To import the data stored in the mailbox to an application software, the software<br />

must be compatible with the TWAIN interface.<br />

Regarding the compatibility of application software with the network scanner driver, see the Network<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Readme.txt in the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1<br />

139


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

140<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

1.7.2 Installation<br />

Procedure<br />

The Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility includes the following two softwares:<br />

● Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver<br />

Scan driver to import the data stored in the mailbox of the machine to the software compatible with<br />

TWAIN.<br />

● Mailbox Viewer<br />

Software to check, import or delete the data stored in the mailbox of the machine.<br />

You can install both software at a time following the installation procedure below:<br />

1 Click Start and then click Run.<br />

The Run dialog box will be displayed.<br />

2 Insert the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.<br />

Type the drive name (e.g. E:) and the path name (\English\Utility\<br />

Win9x_Me\SCN\Disk1\Setup, \English\Utility\NT40\SCN\Disk1\Setup<br />

or \English\Utility\Win2000\SCN\Disk1\Setup), then click OK. The drive<br />

name may be different depending on your system (personal computer).


3 Click Next and continue with the installation.<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

4 When the installation is completed, the following dialog box appears.<br />

Click “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.”, then Finish.<br />

The installation is completed and the Windows restarts automatically.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

141


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

142<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

1.7.3 Uninstallation<br />

Procedure<br />

This section describes the procedure to remove the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

installed in Microsoft Windows.<br />

When upgrading the network scanner utility, make sure you uninstall the existing network scanner<br />

utility.<br />

1 Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, then Add/Remove Programs.<br />

2 Click <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility, then Add/Remove.<br />

3 Click Yes.<br />

The uninstallation is completed.


2Documents for<br />

Scanning<br />

2.1 About Documents .......................................................................... 144<br />

2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes................................................ 144<br />

2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing ................................ 145<br />

2.1.3 Special Documents to Note ............................................ 145<br />

2.2 Loading Documents ....................................................................... 147<br />

2.2.1 On Document Glass ....................................................... 147<br />

2.2.2 In DADF .......................................................................... 148<br />

2.2.3 Document Orientation..................................................... 149<br />

2.2.4 Scanning in Batches....................................................... 150


Documents for Scanning 144<br />

2<br />

2.1<br />

About Documents<br />

You can load documents either on the document glass or in the Duplex Automatic Document<br />

Feeder (DADF).<br />

When installed, the DADF can be used to allow multiple sheets of documents to be loaded.<br />

This section describes the types of documents that can be placed on the document glass or<br />

loaded in the DADF.<br />

2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes<br />

The document sizes that can be loaded on the document glass or in the DADF<br />

are as follows:<br />

Suitable<br />

document size<br />

Document Glass DADF<br />

Minimum: 15 × 15 mm<br />

Maximum: 334.5 × 452 mm<br />

Scan area 297 × 432 mm<br />

Document weight<br />

(G.S.M.* 1 )<br />

Loading capacity<br />

(sheets)<br />

Minimum: 148.5 × 210 mm<br />

(A5 )<br />

Maximum: 297 × 432 mm<br />

(A3, 11 × 17")<br />

- 1-sided document: 38 – 128 g/m2 2-sided document* 2 : 50 – 110 g/m2 1 50 (38 – 100 g/m 2 )<br />

40 (101 – 128 g/m2 )<br />

*1 G.S.M. is a measure of the substance of one sheet of paper expressed in grams per<br />

square meter.<br />

*2 The value for scanning both sides of 2-sided document.


2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing<br />

2.1 About Documents<br />

This machine will automatically detect the document size when scanning. For<br />

standard sizes in the table below, you do not need to specify the document size<br />

for scanning.<br />

Automatically detected<br />

document sizes<br />

For the following, the sizes on the left will be detected as sizes on the right:<br />

On document glass:<br />

For scanning documents of non-standard sizes, specify the document size in Scan Size on the Scan<br />

Options tab. For details on entering the document size, see “3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171).<br />

2.1.3 Special Documents to Note<br />

This section describes the special documents to note.<br />

Document glass<br />

Document glass DADF<br />

B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5,<br />

A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5×11" ,<br />

8.5×13", 8.5×14"<br />

● 8×10" → B5 ● 8.5×13" → A4<br />

● 8×10" → A4 ● 8.5×14" → A4<br />

● 8×10.5" → A4 ● 11×15" → A3<br />

B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 ,<br />

A3, 8.5×11", 8.5×11" ,<br />

8.5×14", 11×17"<br />

● 8.5×11"* → A4 ● 11×17" → A3<br />

* For 8.5×11", the detected size can be changed according to the settings by the customer engineer.<br />

In DADF:<br />

● 11×15" → A3<br />

For the following types of documents, an error message about the document size<br />

not being detected automatically might be displayed or an image loss might<br />

occur.<br />

Resolve the problem by the suggested solution.<br />

Documents for Scanning 2<br />

145


146<br />

2.1 About Documents<br />

Documents for Scanning 2●<br />

DADF<br />

Document Solution<br />

Document of non-standard<br />

size<br />

Glossy documents<br />

Thick documents<br />

(e.g. booklets)<br />

Highly transparent documents<br />

(e.g. transparencies)<br />

Torn, wrinkled, punched or<br />

curled documents<br />

Specify the document size in Scan Size on the Scan Options<br />

tab.<br />

Place a piece of white paper of the same size on top of the<br />

document. Alternatively, specify the document size in Scan<br />

Size on the Scan Options tab.<br />

Do not load very wet documents. Water might leak to the internal part of the machine causing<br />

machine breakdown.<br />

● Do not load documents heavier than 5 kg. You may break the document glass and the machine.<br />

Documents in photo albums might not be scanned correctly due to the wavy condition of the film.<br />

“3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171) for details on entering the document size.<br />

The following types of documents might be jammed or spoilt if loaded in the<br />

DADF. Place them on the document glass.<br />

● documents with folded lines ● torn, wrinkled, punched or curled documents<br />

● glossy documents (e.g. photos) ● clipped, stapled or glued documents<br />

● cut and pasted documents ● documents with coating or carbon on the reverse<br />

side<br />

● thick documents ● highly transparent documents (e.g. transparencies)<br />

● lightweight documents ● heat-sensitive documents


2.2<br />

Loading Documents<br />

This section describes the procedure of loading documents.<br />

2.2.1 On Document Glass<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to load document on the document<br />

glass.<br />

1 Open the document cover.<br />

2 Place the document facing down and<br />

align it against the upper left corner of<br />

the document glass.<br />

Place a sheet of white paper on top of highly transparent<br />

documents like transparencies or tracing paper.<br />

3 Close the document cover.<br />

● When scanning thick documents, do<br />

not use excessive force to press it<br />

against the document glass. The<br />

glass may break and injure you.<br />

● Avoid looking at the copy lamp<br />

directly when scanning with the document<br />

cover open. It may strain or<br />

hurt your eyes.<br />

Documents for Scanning<br />

2<br />

147


Documents for Scanning 2<br />

148<br />

2.2 Loading Documents<br />

2.2.2 In DADF<br />

Procedure<br />

The DADF allows you to load up to 50 sheets of documents from 148.5 × 210<br />

mm to 297 × 432 mm. The loaded documents will be scanned from the topmost<br />

sheet down and then output with the scanned side facing down. The following<br />

procedure describes how to load documents in the DADF.<br />

Up to 40 sheets of heavyweight (101 – 128 g/m 2 ) can be loaded.<br />

1 Align the edges of the documents.<br />

Remove any clips or staples attached to the documents.<br />

When loading large documents, pull out the extension tray.<br />

2 Place the documents facing up (side<br />

one facing up for 2-sided documents),<br />

aligned to the inner corner of the<br />

DADF, and in the direction of the<br />

arrow.<br />

The confirmation indicator lights up.<br />

Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left setting.<br />

The scanned documents will be retrieved as Head<br />

to Top setting on the computer.<br />

3 Shift the document guide to gently<br />

touch the edge of the document.<br />

Avoid the following actions to prevent jamming or<br />

damaging your documents:<br />

● Do not hold on to documents when they are being<br />

fed into the feeder.<br />

● Do not allow the output documents to over-stack on<br />

the document output tray.<br />

● Do not place any object on the document output tray.


Mixed size documents<br />

2.2 Loading Documents<br />

Documents of different sizes can be loaded together. To do this, align the documents<br />

against the inner corner of the DADF, and set Mixed Size Originals on the<br />

Scan Options tab to On before scanning. If this option is not selected before<br />

scanning, it will cause the document to jam.<br />

For details, see “3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals” (P. 168).<br />

2.2.3 Document Orientation<br />

When the DADF has been installed and used for scanning, you have to set Original<br />

Orientation in order to specify the “Head” position of the document.<br />

For Original Orientation of 2 Sided Originals, select either Head to Top or Head<br />

to Left.<br />

Usually, load the documents in the “Head to Left” orientation. The scanned documents<br />

will be retrieved as “Head to Top” orientation on the computer.<br />

When retrieving 2-sided documents, check if the image is set in the orientation<br />

defined in Original Orientation.<br />

● Head to Left<br />

● Head to Top<br />

“3.3.4 Original Orientation” (P. 166) for details on Original Orientation.<br />

Documents for Scanning 2<br />

149


Documents for Scanning 2<br />

150<br />

2.2 Loading Documents<br />

2.2.4 Scanning in Batches<br />

Procedure<br />

When there is another batch of documents to be scanned after the first batch has<br />

been done, select the Next Original button on the screen displayed on the touch<br />

panel display while scanning, so as to prepare the machine for the next batch of<br />

documents waiting to be scanned. Multiple documents can be scanned as one<br />

piece of data. Up to 999 pages can be stored.<br />

When the pages of the scanning documents are beyond the maximum storable amount of pages, scanning<br />

is aborted. Select whether to stop scanning or restart scanning according to the message displayed.<br />

The maximum storable amount of pages can be changed. For more details, see “5.8.6 Others (Scan<br />

Mode Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

1 Select Next Original while scanning the document.<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

● When using the DADF, wait until the machine has completed scanning the first batch of documents<br />

before loading the next batch.<br />

● If no action is carried out after the above screen has been displayed for some time, the machine will<br />

reboot automatically with the assumption that there are no more documents to be scanned. You can<br />

change the default value of this auto clear time in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />

the way to change, see “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier). The default value is 60 (seconds).<br />

2 Load the next batch of documents.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Close


2.2 Loading Documents<br />

3 Press Start.<br />

When there are more batches of documents, repeat the procedure of loading the documents and press<br />

the Start button.<br />

4 Select Last Original after all the documents have been scanned.<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Save in : Mailbox 001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Start<br />

Close<br />

Documents for Scanning 2<br />

151


3Scanning With Mailbox<br />

3.1 How to Scan................................................................................... 154<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status ..................................... 156<br />

3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine ........................ 156<br />

3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer.............................. 158<br />

3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction........................ 158<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings ............................................................. 160<br />

3.3.1 Output Color ................................................................... 160<br />

3.3.2 Scan Resolution.............................................................. 162<br />

3.3.3 2 Sided Originals ............................................................ 163<br />

3.3.4 Original Orientation......................................................... 166<br />

3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals ....................................................... 168<br />

3.3.6 Scan Size........................................................................ 171<br />

3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge.............................................................. 174<br />

3.3.8 Bound Originals .............................................................. 177<br />

3.3.9 Border Erase................................................................... 180<br />

3.3.10 Original Type................................................................... 183<br />

3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast .................................................. 185<br />

3.3.12 Auto Exposure ................................................................ 187<br />

3.3.13 Image Compression........................................................ 189<br />

3.3.14 File Format...................................................................... 191<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer ........................................... 194<br />

3.4.1 Importing to Application Program ................................... 194<br />

3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer ...................................... 199<br />

3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />

............................................................................... 201<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox ................................. 203<br />

3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine ............................... 203<br />

3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox Viewer) ......... 206<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings ................................... 208<br />

3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings ................... 208<br />

3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings ................................. 212


Scanning With Mailbox 154<br />

3<br />

3.1<br />

How to Scan<br />

Using this machine, you can scan the document, and then save the scanned data in the<br />

mailbox. The scanned data can be saved as JPEG or TIFF file format.<br />

This section describes the basic flow of scanning.<br />

To use this machine for scanning, you need to set the IP address, enable the port, and create the mailbox beforehand.<br />

For details on these settings, see “1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox” (P. 122).<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Under Save to, select Mailbox.<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...


3.1 How to Scan<br />

4 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />

use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter the mailbox number directly at Go to.<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 006 007<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

If there are documents in the mailbox, the number of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed<br />

on the bottom right of the screen in No. of Docs: once the mailbox is selected.<br />

● If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password and<br />

then select the Confirm button. If you have forgotten the mailbox password, reset it in the System<br />

Administration Mode.<br />

● Selecting the mailbox and the Document List button will enable you to check documents saved in<br />

the mailbox. After checking, select the Close button.<br />

5 Select Close.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

6 If necessary, configure the scan settings.<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

“3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” (P. 160) for details on configuring the scan settings.<br />

7 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Go to<br />

Document List<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

005 006 007<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs: 10<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

155


Scanning With Mailbox 156<br />

3<br />

3.2<br />

Canceling Scanning/<br />

Checking Job Status<br />

This section describes how to cancel scanning and check the status of scan jobs in process.<br />

Once scanning is canceled, the scan data already saved in the mailbox will also be deleted.<br />

3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to cancel scanning from this machine is as follows.<br />

If the following screen does not appear, refer to the procedure on the next page,<br />

“ Canceling scan jobs in this machine” (P. 157).<br />

1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Close<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />

2 To stop scanning, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />

the following screen. However, the page in the midst of scanning will be<br />

scanned.<br />

Scan Job<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

:Doc. No. 00048<br />

To continue scanning, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on<br />

the screen.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Start<br />

Close


Canceling scan jobs in this machine<br />

Procedure<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />

The procedure to cancel scan jobs received by the machine is as follows:<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Current and Pending Jobs.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

A list of jobs in process or waiting will be displayed.<br />

3 Select the job that you want to delete.<br />

Job Status<br />

The job status will be displayed.<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

4 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>User</strong> Imari: Host 0/100<br />

00005-Scan Job Scanning Mailbox 001<br />

3<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Close<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

157


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

158<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />

5 To stop scanning, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />

the following screen. However, the page in the midst of scanning will be<br />

scanned.<br />

To continue scanning, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on the<br />

screen.<br />

6 Select Close.<br />

Repeat steps 2 to 5 if you have other jobs to delete.<br />

3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer<br />

You can use CentreWare Internet Services to cancel scanning from the computer.<br />

The Help file displayed by clicking the Help button on the bottom frame of CentreWare Internet Services<br />

screen for details on using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction<br />

The procedure to check the status of job in the process of scanning is as follows:<br />

Using this machine<br />

Procedure<br />

Scan Job<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

:Doc. No. 00048<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Start<br />

Close


3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />

2 On the screen, select either Current and Pending Jobs or Completed<br />

Jobs.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

A list of jobs will be displayed.<br />

3 Check the job status.<br />

Job Status<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

For example, if a job in process is selected, the following screen will be displayed.<br />

4 After checking, press Features on the control panel.<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>User</strong> Imari: Host 0/100<br />

00005-Scan Job Scanning Mailbox 001<br />

3<br />

Scan Job<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

:Doc. No. 00048<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

You can also use CentreWare Internet Services to check job status of scan jobs.<br />

See “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)”<br />

(P. 105) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Close<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

159


Scanning With Mailbox 160<br />

3<br />

3.3<br />

Configuring Scan Settings<br />

This section describes the scan settings for scanning.<br />

The following scan settings are available:<br />

● Output Color<br />

● Scan Resolution<br />

● 2 Sided Originals (available only if DADF is attached)<br />

● Scan Size<br />

● Mixed Size Originals (available only if DADF is attached)<br />

● Reduce/Enlarge<br />

● Bound Originals<br />

● Border Erase<br />

● Original Type<br />

● Lighter/Darker/Contrast<br />

● Auto Exposure<br />

● Image Compression<br />

● File Format<br />

Configure the required scan settings according to the following procedures:<br />

3.3.1 Output Color<br />

You can set the output color for scanning the document.<br />

The options available for output color are as follows:<br />

● Auto<br />

Select this to detect the color of the document automatically so that color document will be scanned<br />

in full color and black/white document in black/white.<br />

● Full Color<br />

Select this when scanning color documents. It can reproduce text in office documents clearly or gradations<br />

in color faithfully.<br />

● Grayscale<br />

Select this when scanning in grayscale. It can also reproduce faithfully the shades in black and white<br />

as well as the mid tones of gradation. It is suitable for shades which cannot be expressed in black<br />

and white only.<br />

● Black<br />

Select this when scanning black and white documents. Then, select the Original Type for black and<br />

white documents as described in “3.3.10 Original Type” (P. 183)<br />

● You can change the default value of Output Color in the System Administration Mode. For details<br />

on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier). The default is set as Black.<br />

● Scan resolution might differ according to the installed memory capacity. For details, contact our<br />

Customer Support Center.


Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select the output color option from Output Color on the Basic Scanning<br />

screen.<br />

5 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

6 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

161


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

162<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3.3.2 Scan Resolution<br />

Procedure<br />

You can set the scan resolution for scanning the document.<br />

The options available for scan resolution are as follows. The larger the value, the<br />

finer the scan but the data size will become bigger.<br />

● 200 dpi<br />

● 300 dpi<br />

● 400 dpi<br />

● 600 dpi<br />

● For data that is larger, the processing of scanning and data transferring might be slower.<br />

● You can change the default value of Scan Resolution in the System Administration Mode. For<br />

details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default is set as 200dpi.<br />

● Scan resolution might differ according to the installed memory capacity. For details, contact our<br />

Customer Support Center.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select the scan resolution option from Scan Resolution on the Basic<br />

Scanning screen.<br />

5 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

6 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.3 2 Sided Originals<br />

Procedure<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

When the DADF is attached, you can scan both sides of 2-sided documents<br />

automatically.<br />

When the binding location of the document is set, the top and bottom edges of both<br />

sides of the document will be arranged in the same direction and scanned.<br />

You cannot change the default value of 2 Sided Originals as it is fixed.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

163


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

164<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

4 Select 2 Sided (H to H) or 2 Sided (H to T) from 2 Sided Originals on<br />

the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

To specify the orientation and binding location of the documents, select<br />

More….<br />

■When More… has been selected:<br />

The 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed.<br />

1<br />

Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

2 If 2 Sided has been selected, select the desired item under Originals.<br />

If 1 Sided has been selected, proceed to step 3 .


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

● Select the Head to Head button for documents with the top/bottom of the image in the same direction<br />

on both sides of the document.<br />

● Select the Head to Toe button for documents with the top/bottom of the image on one side in the<br />

opposite direction of the top/bottom of the image on the other side.<br />

3<br />

Check Original Orientation.<br />

Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left setting. The scanned<br />

documents will be retrieved as Head to Top orientation on the computer.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

If the document is not loaded in the direction specified in Original Orientation, the Head of the document<br />

will be wrongly detected by the machine. For details on Original Orientation, see “3.3.4 Original<br />

Orientation” (P. 166).<br />

● When Original Orientation is set as Head to Top:<br />

● When Original Orientation is set as Head to Left:<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

165


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

166<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

6 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

7 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.4 Original Orientation<br />

When the DADF is installed and used for scanning, you have to set Original Orientation<br />

in order to specify the Head position of the document.<br />

The options for Original Orientation are as follows:<br />

Usually, load the documents in the “Head to Left” orientation. The scanned documents<br />

will be retrieved as “Head to Top” orientation on the computer.<br />

● Head to Left<br />

Select this when you place the “Head” of the document at the left edge of the document glass or<br />

DADF. Always select this for documents placed with the Head at the left edge (with texts of the horizontal<br />

type).<br />

● Head to Top<br />

Select this when you place the “Head” of the document at the top edge of the document glass or<br />

DADF.<br />

● The orientation of the original document is not effected by the orientation of the scanned data.<br />

● You can change the default value of Original Orientation in the System Administration Mode. For<br />

details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default is set as Head to Left.


Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select More… from 2 Sided Originals on the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

The 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed.<br />

5 Based on the orientation of the document loaded, select either Head to<br />

Top or Head to Left from Original Orientation.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

167


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

168<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left orientation as shown in the following diagram.<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals<br />

When the DADF is installed and used for scanning, documents of different sizes<br />

can be scanned.<br />

The options available for Mixed Size Originals are as follows.<br />

● On<br />

Select this to automatically detect the different sizes when scanning documents of mixed sizes. For<br />

details on the sizes that can be detected automatically, see “2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing”<br />

(P. 145).<br />

● Off<br />

Select this when scanning documents of the same size.<br />

When using the Mixed Size Originals feature, be sure to load A5-sized document in the portrait orientation<br />

( ). Loading it in the landscape orientation may cause the document to jam or machine breakdown.<br />

● You can change the default value of Mixed Size Originals in the System Administration Mode. For<br />

details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default value is set as Off.<br />

● When you use this Mixed Size Originals feature, be sure to set Scan Size of the Scan Options screen<br />

to Auto Size Detect.<br />

● If Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen is set as Auto % and size is specified in Output Size,<br />

the documents will be automatically enlarged/reduced according to the specified size for scanning.<br />

● If the size cannot be automatically detected, an error message will prompt you to enter the document<br />

size.


Procedure<br />

1 Load documents in the Head to Left<br />

orientation with the edges A and B of<br />

the documents aligned at the top left<br />

corners.<br />

Remove any clips or staples attached to the documents.<br />

The documents might not be scanned correctly if<br />

their top left corners are not properly aligned.<br />

● Edge A of the document refers to the width of the edge<br />

that is being fed into the machine.<br />

2 Load all documents aligned to the<br />

inner edge of the DADF and the document<br />

guide.<br />

Align edge A of documents to the mouth of the<br />

feeder and adjust the document guide accordingly.<br />

“2.2.2 In DADF” (P. 148) for details on loading documents<br />

to the DADF.<br />

Be sure to align edge B of documents to the inner edge of<br />

the DADF. If the documents are not loaded correctly, it<br />

may cause the document to jam.<br />

3 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

4 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

169


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

170<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 Check Scan Size on the Scan Options screen.<br />

■When Auto Size Detect is displayed:<br />

Proceed to step 6.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

■When options other than Auto Size Detect are displayed:<br />

See “3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171) for details on setting Auto Size Detect.<br />

6 Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

The Mixed Size Originals screen is displayed.<br />

7 Select On.<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Select On for this feature when<br />

copying originals of different<br />

sizes using the Document Feeder.<br />

8 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Cancel<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Save


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

9 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

10 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.6 Scan Size<br />

Procedure<br />

You can configure the scan size for scanning.<br />

Set the scan size when scanning documents of non-standard sizes or to a different<br />

size.<br />

If the scan size is set, scanning will be done according to the specified size<br />

regardless of the actual size of the document loaded.<br />

Options for setting scan size are as follows:<br />

● Auto Size Detect<br />

Detects the document size automatically.<br />

● Standard Sizes<br />

Choose from the 11 set sizes: A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" ,<br />

8.5×11" , Photo 2L Size , Photo L Size .<br />

● Custom<br />

Specifies the size in the range of the document glass, 15 – 432 mm for X (horizontal direction) and<br />

15 – 297 mm for Y (vertical direction) in units of 1 mm. When setting custom size, use the ruler<br />

markings surrounding the document glass as a guide.<br />

● Among the buttons of Scan Size, the default values of all sizes except Auto Size Detect can be<br />

changed in the System Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode<br />

Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as A3 ,<br />

A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" , 8.5×11" , Photo 2L Size , Photo L<br />

Size .<br />

● If the size cannot be automatically detected, an error message will prompt you to enter the document<br />

size.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

171


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

172<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

4 Select Scan Size on the Scan Options screen.<br />

The Scan Size screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

5 Set the scan size.<br />

■When specifying Standard Sizes:<br />

1 Select from the scan sizes displayed.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Size<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Auto Size<br />

Detect<br />

A3<br />

A4<br />

A4<br />

A5<br />

B4<br />

B5<br />

11x17"<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

8.5x11"<br />

8.5x11"<br />

Photo 2L 5x7"<br />

Photo L 3.5x5"<br />

Cancel<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Save<br />

(15 - 297)<br />

Y<br />

Auto<br />

mm<br />

X<br />

(15 - 432)<br />

Auto mm


■When specifying Custom:<br />

2 Using , set the values of X and Y.<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size<br />

Detect<br />

A3<br />

A4<br />

A4<br />

A5<br />

B4<br />

B5<br />

11x17"<br />

8.5x11"<br />

8.5x11"<br />

Photo 2L 5x7"<br />

Photo L 3.5x5"<br />

Cancel<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Save<br />

(15 - 297)<br />

Y<br />

Auto<br />

mm<br />

X<br />

(15 - 432)<br />

Auto mm<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

173


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

174<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Procedure<br />

You can configure the scan % for scanning.<br />

Options for setting the scan % are as follows:<br />

● Preset %<br />

Choose from eight preset %: 100%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 115%, 122%, 141%.<br />

● Variable %<br />

Enter your own % for scanning. Enter between 25 to 400%, and in 1% units.<br />

● Auto %<br />

The % for scanning is automatically set based on the document size and the size set for Output Size.<br />

● Among the % for Preset %, the default values of all % except 100% can be changed in the System<br />

Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1<br />

Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 115%,<br />

122%, 141%.<br />

● The default values of Output Size when Auto % has been selected for scanning can be changed in<br />

the System Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings”<br />

in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as A3 , A4 , A4 ,<br />

A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" .<br />

● Areas that turn blank after scanning with Auto % will become white.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...


4 Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

5 Set the scan %.<br />

■When selecting Preset %:<br />

1 Select Preset % and then the % for scanning.<br />

■When selecting Variable %:<br />

1<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Cancel<br />

Preset %<br />

(25 - 400)<br />

100 %<br />

100% 70%<br />

A3 A4<br />

B4 B5<br />

Variable %<br />

81%<br />

B4 A4<br />

B5 A5<br />

Auto %<br />

50%<br />

A3 A5<br />

86%<br />

A3 B4<br />

A4 B5<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Select Variable % and then specify the % for scanning by using either<br />

or the numeric keypad on the screen.<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Preset %<br />

Variable %<br />

Auto %<br />

(25 - 400)<br />

100<br />

%<br />

1<br />

4<br />

7<br />

Cancel<br />

2<br />

5<br />

8<br />

115%<br />

122%<br />

141%<br />

3<br />

6<br />

9<br />

0 C<br />

Save<br />

B4 A3<br />

B5 A4<br />

A4 B4<br />

A5 B5<br />

A4 A3<br />

B5 B4<br />

Save<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

175


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

176<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

■When selecting Auto %:<br />

1 Select Auto % and then the % for scanning from Output Size.<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Preset %<br />

Variable %<br />

Auto %<br />

Output Size<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />

A3<br />

A4<br />

A4<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

A5<br />

B4<br />

B5<br />

Cancel<br />

11x17"<br />

Save<br />

8.5x11"


3.3.8 Bound Originals<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

You can scan facing pages of a bound document on separate sheets of paper in<br />

page order. Useful for separating the left and right pages of bound documents for<br />

scanning.<br />

● Left Page then Right<br />

Scans from the left page of documents whose page numbers start from the left.<br />

● Right Page then Left<br />

Scans from the right page of documents whose page numbers start from the right.<br />

● Top Page then Bottom<br />

Scans from the top page of documents whose page numbers start from the top.<br />

● To scan Bound Originals, place the document on the document glass.<br />

● Bound documents of non-standard size will not be correctly separated into two parts for scanning.<br />

1 Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

The Bound Originals screen is displayed.<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

177


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

178<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

2 Select the correct document type.<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Left Page<br />

then Right<br />

Right Page<br />

then Left<br />

Top Page<br />

then Bottom<br />

Cancel<br />

3 Select the page order to scan.<br />

Here, we will scan documents of the “Left Page then Right” type as an example.<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Left Page<br />

then Right<br />

Right Page<br />

then Left<br />

Top Page<br />

then Bottom<br />

Both Pages<br />

Left Page<br />

Only<br />

Right Page<br />

Only<br />

Center Erase<br />

(0 - 50)<br />

0 mm<br />

Cancel<br />

Selecting Left Page Only or Right Page Only will scan only the left or right pages of the document in<br />

page order.<br />

4 When Center Erase is selected, set the width to be erased using .<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Left Page<br />

then Right<br />

Right Page<br />

then Left<br />

Top Page<br />

then Bottom<br />

Both Pages<br />

Left Page<br />

Only<br />

Right Page<br />

Only<br />

Center Erase<br />

(0 - 50)<br />

0 mm<br />

Cancel<br />

Save<br />

Save<br />

Load your originals<br />

as shown below.<br />

Save<br />

Load your originals<br />

as shown below.


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 Check the document type and then place the facing pages of the document<br />

on the document glass.<br />

Bound Originals cannot be used in the DADF.<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />

7 Select other scan settings if necessary.<br />

To cancel setting, press the C button on the control panel.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

179


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

180<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3.3.9 Border Erase<br />

When scanning bound documents or documents with the document cover open,<br />

black marks may appear around the edges or at the center binding area of the<br />

scanned result. For such cases, you can erase these marks.<br />

Options available for erasing these marks are as follows:<br />

● Top & Bottom Edges<br />

Select this to erase marks at the top and bottom edges of the document. Erases the marks at the top/<br />

bottom edges based on the orientation of the document loaded.<br />

The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value<br />

is 2 mm.<br />

● Left & Right Edges<br />

Select this to erase marks at the left and right edges of the document. Erases the marks at the left/<br />

right edges based on the orientation of the document loaded.<br />

The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value<br />

is 2 mm.<br />

● Center Erase<br />

Select this to erase marks at the center of bound documents. The width of the edges to be erased can<br />

be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value is 0 mm.<br />

● As the Top & Bottom Edges and Left & Right Edges in the Normal setting have been set as 2 mm,<br />

you need to go to the Variable Erase setting to change these values to 0 mm if no border erase is<br />

required.<br />

● For 2-sided documents, you can set the same border erase value for both sides of the document.<br />

● When Reduce/Enlarge has been set, the border erase value will be decreased/increased proportionately<br />

to the scan %.<br />

● The settings for Top & Bottom Edges and Left & Right Edges can be changed in the System Administration<br />

Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).


1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Select Border Erase on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

The Border Erase screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Variable Erase.<br />

Border Erase<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Using , specify a value for each of Top & Bottom Edges, Left &<br />

Right Edges and Center Erase.<br />

Border Erase<br />

Variable Erase<br />

Normal<br />

Variable Erase<br />

2 mm 2 mm 0 mm<br />

(0 - 50) (0 - 50) (0 - 50)<br />

2 mm 2 mm 0 mm<br />

Cancel<br />

Cancel<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm.<br />

Save<br />

Original Orientation<br />

Head to Top<br />

Head to Left<br />

Save<br />

Original Orientation<br />

Head to Top<br />

Head to Left<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

181


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

182<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 Check Original Orientation.<br />

Edge Erase<br />

Normal<br />

Variable<br />

Erase<br />

(0 - 50) (0 - 50) (0 - 50)<br />

5 mm 5 mm 0 mm<br />

If the document is loaded in a different orientation from the setting in Original Orientation, the scan<br />

result will not be the target result.<br />

For details on Original Orientation, see “3.3.4 Original Orientation” (P. 166).<br />

6 Select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Scan Options screen.<br />

7 Select other scan settings if necessary.<br />

To cancel setting, press the C button on the control panel.<br />

Cancel<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Save<br />

Original Orientation<br />

Head to Top<br />

Head to Left


3.3.10 Original Type<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

When Black has been selected for Output Color, you can select the Original<br />

Type for black and white documents.<br />

● Text & Photo<br />

Select this when scanning documents with both text and photo. You can automatically detect text<br />

and photo, and then set the respective image mode for text and photo.<br />

● Text<br />

Select this when you want to scan text clearly. You can also scan photo, graph and drawing clearly.<br />

● Photo<br />

Select this when scanning photo.<br />

You can change the default value of Original Type in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />

the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

The default is set as Text.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

183


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

184<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Original Type on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

The Original Type screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select the Original Type option.<br />

Original Type<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Text & Photo<br />

Text<br />

Photo<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

This feature only works when the<br />

image is scanned using the Black<br />

option in Output Color.<br />

Cancel<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

Save


3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

You can configure the density to scan documents. Even when Output Color has<br />

been set to Full Color or Grayscale, you can still set the contrast.<br />

● Lighter/Darker<br />

Select from seven levels of density from Lighter to Darker. The closer to Darker, the darker is the<br />

density of scan, and the closer to Lighter, the lighter is the scan.<br />

● Contrast<br />

Select from five levels of density from Higher to Lower. The closer to Higher, the greater the difference<br />

between the bright and dark areas with the bright areas becoming brighter, and dark areas<br />

darker. The closer to Lower, the smaller the difference between the bright and dark areas.<br />

● You can change the default value of Lighter/Darker in the System Administration Mode. For details<br />

on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier). The default value is set as Normal.<br />

● You can change the default value of Contrast in the System Administration Mode. For details on the<br />

way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

The default value is set as Normal.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

185


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

186<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format<br />

screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

The Lighter/Darker/Contrast screen is displayed.<br />

5 Configure the Lighter/Darker and Contrast settings.<br />

When Black has been selected for Output Color, the Contrast setting will not be displayed.<br />

■When setting Lighter/Darker:<br />

1 Use in Lighter/Darker to specify the density.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

■When selecting Contrast:<br />

<br />

1 Use in Contrast to specify the contrast.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.12 Auto Exposure<br />

Procedure<br />

You can remove colors from the reverse side of the document when scanning<br />

the front side.<br />

You can change the default value of Auto Exposure in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />

the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

The default value is set as Off.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

187


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

188<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

The Auto Exposure screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select On.<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

Cancel<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

Save


3.3.13 Image Compression<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

When Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for Output Color, you can select<br />

how to compress full color documents.<br />

● High<br />

Saves the file at a high compression rate. The file size becomes smaller but with a loss in image<br />

quality.<br />

● Normal<br />

Saves the file at the normal compression rate. Produces the normal file size and image quality.<br />

● Low<br />

Saves the file at a low compression rate. The image quality is better but the file size becomes bigger.<br />

The default is set as Normal.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

189


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

190<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Image Compression on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

The Image Compression screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select the compression method.<br />

Image Compression<br />

High<br />

Normal<br />

Low<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

This feature does not work<br />

when the image is scanned<br />

using the Black option in<br />

Output Color.<br />

Cancel<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

Save


3.3.14 File Format<br />

You can set the file format for saving scanned data.<br />

The options available are as follows:<br />

Selected settings on<br />

Output Color<br />

The color of the original<br />

document is in parenthesis.<br />

TIFF/<br />

JPEG<br />

Auto<br />

Select<br />

File Format<br />

JPEG TIFF<br />

Auto (color) JPEG × ×<br />

Auto (black and white) TIFF × ×<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

Grayscale JPEG<br />

Black TIFF ×<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

DocuWor<br />

ks (XDW)<br />

When selecting Auto on the Output Color setting, and TIFF/JPEG Auto Select on the File Format setting<br />

while using the optional E-mail Scanning, JPEG is set to full color and grayscale documents and<br />

TIFF is set to black and white documents automatically per page.<br />

PDF<br />

: Can be set<br />

× : Cannot be set<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

191


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

192<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

4 Select File Format on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

The File Format screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

5 Select the compression method.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

File Format Cancel Save<br />

TIFF/JPEG<br />

Auto Select<br />

TIFF<br />

JPEG<br />

DocuWorks<br />

PDF<br />

This feature is available for Job<br />

Template and it cannot be programmed<br />

on this screen. It does not work<br />

when Mailbox is selected.<br />

TIFF/JPEG Auto Select automatically<br />

selects JPEG for Full Color and<br />

Grayscale images and TIFF for<br />

black/white images.


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

193


Scanning With Mailbox 194<br />

3<br />

3.4<br />

Importing Scanned Data to<br />

Computer<br />

There are two ways to import data stored in the mailbox of this machine to the computer:<br />

● import data saved in mailbox to an application program<br />

● import data saved in mailbox from mailbox viewer<br />

This section describes the two different procedures.<br />

3.4.1 Importing to Application Program<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />

this machine to an application program.<br />

To import mailbox data, you need to use the network scanner driver.<br />

The network scanner driver is software used to import document (scanned data)<br />

saved in this mailbox of this machine to an application program on the client via<br />

the network.<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example.<br />

“1.6 Configuring Computer” (P. 138) for details on installing the network scanner driver.<br />

1 Start the application program for importing documents.<br />

The application program must support TWAIN. TWAIN is the standard for input equipment such as<br />

scanners.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details on the verified application programs that are supported by this<br />

machine.


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

2 From the File menu, select the command for selecting scan (source).<br />

The following screen is an example using the trial DocuWorks V4.0. The command name for selecting<br />

scan (source) differs according to the application program used.<br />

3 Select FX Network Scan from Sources and then click Select.<br />

4 From the File menu, select the command to import the image from the<br />

scanner.<br />

The following screen is an example using the trial DocuWorks V4.0. The command name to import<br />

image from the scanner differs according to the application program.<br />

The Network <strong>Scanner</strong> dialog box appears and scanners on the same network will be displayed.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

195


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

196<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

5 Select the scanner for connection from the list and then click Select<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong>.<br />

● When nothing is displayed, click the New Display button. There will be another search for the scanner.<br />

● Clicking the Change Display button will change the method of displaying the scanner name.<br />

● Only scanners within the same network will have their names automatically displayed. To display<br />

scanners on other networks, click the Change Display button to change settings.<br />

“3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings” (P. 208) for details on how to change scanner<br />

name and connect to other network.<br />

The dialog box to specify the mailbox will be displayed.<br />

6 Enter the mailbox password (001-200) for saving the documents for<br />

importing at Mailbox No. and the password at Password.<br />

● If the Save Password check box is checked, steps 5 to 7 can be omitted when you select the same<br />

mailbox the next time.<br />

● Clicking the Change <strong>Scanner</strong> button will return the screen to step 5 and you can re-select the scanner.<br />

7 Click Open Mailbox.<br />

A list of documents saved in the selected mailbox will be displayed.


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

8 From the list, select the document for importing, and click Import.<br />

● You can select multiple documents.<br />

● You can also select Import, Update and Delete from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the<br />

list.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

197


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

198<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

Each item is explained below:<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Name Displays the name of the scanner which is connected.<br />

Mailbox No. Displays the number of the mailbox which is selected.<br />

File No. Displays the number which is automatically assigned by the<br />

machine.<br />

File Type Displays the type of document.<br />

Date/Time Displays the date and time of saving the document in the mailbox.<br />

No. (Pages) Displays the total number of sheets of documents. When Setting<br />

is clicked, if the Display mode under File List mode is set as<br />

Page in the Setting dialog box, Page is displayed and the number<br />

of pages will be displayed.<br />

Size Displays the size of documents.<br />

Type Displays the file format of documents. Select from JPG, MH, or<br />

MHR.<br />

Import button Imports the document.<br />

Delete button Deletes the document.<br />

Change <strong>Scanner</strong> button Changes the scanner to be connected. Returns to the screen of<br />

step 5.<br />

Update button Updates the document list in the selected mailbox.<br />

Setting button Displays the Setting dialog box and the way of displaying documents<br />

and importing documents can be changed.<br />

“3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings” (P. 208) for<br />

details on the method of changing.<br />

Cancel button Closes the color network driver.<br />

Help button Displays the on-line help of the color network scanner driver.


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

When importing of documents begins, the following dialog box will be displayed and the scanned data<br />

will be transferred from the mailbox to the client.<br />

When the transfer is completed, the document is imported to the application program and the document<br />

in the mailbox deleted.<br />

● When scanning is done by pages, documents with pages not scanned will be displayed in the list<br />

preceded by “∗”.<br />

● Except for DocuWorks, the network scanner driver extends the compression data and transfers it to<br />

the application program in BMP format for almost all other application programs.<br />

3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer<br />

The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />

this machine to an application program.<br />

To import scanned data in the mailbox to the computer, you need to use the<br />

mailbox viewer.<br />

Wordpad for Windows 98 is used as an example here.<br />

“1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility” (P. 139) for details on how to install the mailbox viewer.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

199


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

200<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Carry out steps 1 to 4 of “3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer<br />

(Mailbox Viewer)” (P. 206) to activate the mailbox viewer.<br />

2 From the list, select the document for importing, then click Import.<br />

● You can select multiple documents.<br />

● You can also select Import, Update and Delete from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the<br />

list.<br />

When importing scanned documents from the mailbox viewer to the computer, the Import all existing<br />

documents must be checked for the Setting dialog box. When it is checked, the Update button of the<br />

mailbox viewer becomes Import.<br />

“3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings” (P. 212)<br />

Clicking the Import button will import all scanned data in the mailbox to save it to a specified directory<br />

(default: C:\temp).


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using Centre-<br />

Ware Internet Services<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />

this machine using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

For a brief description of CentreWare Internet Services, see “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” “Chapter 5 Configuring<br />

From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

1 Activate the host device, and then the browser.<br />

2 Enter the IP address or Internet address of this machine at the address<br />

column of the browser, and then press Enter on the keyboard.<br />

The CentreWare Internet Services screen will be displayed.<br />

Check with the system administrator on the IP address and Internet address to be entered.<br />

3 Select Mailbox on the Properties tab.<br />

The screen for specifying the mailbox will be displayed.<br />

4 Enter the mailbox number (1-200) for saving the documents to be<br />

imported, and the password at Password.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

201


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

202<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

5 Click Display Document List.<br />

A list of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed.<br />

6 Mark the checkbox of the document number to import, and click<br />

Retrieve.<br />

A screen for confirming retrieval of the mailbox document will be displayed.<br />

For details on operation, see On-line Help displayed by clicking Help on the bottom frame.


3.5 Checking/Deleting<br />

Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

There are two ways to check/delete documents saved in the mailbox of this machine:<br />

● using this machine, delete scanned documents<br />

● using the computer, check/delete scanned documents (using mailbox viewer)<br />

This section describes the two different procedures.<br />

Scanned documents cannot be printed.<br />

3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure below describes how to check/delete documents saved in the<br />

mailbox of this machine using the touch panel display.<br />

1 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

2 Under Save to, select Mailbox.<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

You can also display the Mailbox screen by pressing the Job Status button on the control panel, and<br />

then selecting the Mailbox button on the Job Status screen.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox<br />

3<br />

203


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

204<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

3 Select the mailbox for selecting/deleting documents.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />

the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the mailbox number at Go to to specify the<br />

mailbox directly.<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 006 007<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

If there are documents in the mailbox, the number of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed<br />

on the bottom right of the screen in No. of Docs: once the mailbox is selected.<br />

If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password and<br />

then select the Confirm button. If you have forgotten the mailbox password, reset it in the System<br />

Administration Mode.<br />

4 Select Document List.<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

The Mailbox xxx – Document List screen is displayed.<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

005 006 007<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs: 10<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

005 006 007<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs: 10


3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

5 Check the document or select the document for deleting.<br />

■Checking document:<br />

1 Check the document.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Mailbox 001- Document List<br />

No. Doc. No.-Type Stored Date Pages<br />

1 00002 - Store For Polling 2001/1/1 2:02 AM 1<br />

2 00004 - Scanned Docs. 2002/10/10 10:10 AM 100<br />

3 00006 - Mailbox Docs. 2002/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />

4 03855 - Scanned Docs. 2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555<br />

5 65535 - Store For Polling 2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />

■Deleting document:<br />

1 Select the document to be deleted, followed by Delete.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. If the<br />

Select All button is selected, all the documents in the mailbox can be selected. You can select either<br />

just one or all documents.<br />

Mailbox 001- Document List<br />

No.<br />

Doc. No.-Type<br />

1 00002 - Store For Polling<br />

2 00004 - Scanned Docs.<br />

3 00006 - Mailbox Docs.<br />

4 03855 - Scanned Docs.<br />

5 65535 - Store For Polling<br />

Stored Date Pages<br />

2001/1/1 2:02 AM 1<br />

2002/10/10 10:10 AM 100<br />

2002/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />

2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555<br />

2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

2 Check the contents on the screen, and then select Yes.<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of step 1 .<br />

Mailbox 001-Show Document List<br />

No. The Document following document(s) No.-Type will Stored be deleted. Date No. of Pages<br />

Mailbox : 001 HID<br />

Doc. 1 00002 No.-Type - Store : For 00002-Store Polling 2001/1/1 For Polling2:02<br />

AM 1<br />

Stored<br />

2 00004<br />

Date<br />

- Scanned<br />

:<br />

Docs.<br />

2001/1/1<br />

2010/10/10<br />

2:02 AM<br />

Are you sure?<br />

10:10 AM 100<br />

3 00006 - Mailbox Docs. 2099/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />

4 03855 - Scanned Docs. Yes2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555 No<br />

5 65535 - Store For Polling 2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />

6 Select Close repeatedly until the Basic Scanning screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

No. of Docs : 10<br />

Select All<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No.of Docs : 10<br />

Select All<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No.of Docs: 10<br />

Select All<br />

Delete<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

205


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

206<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox<br />

Viewer)<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure below describes how to check/delete documents saved in the<br />

mailbox of this machine by using the mailbox viewer.<br />

Wordpad for Windows 98 is used as an example here.<br />

1 Click the Start menu, followed by Programs, <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong>, Utility, and<br />

Mailbox Viewer 2.<br />

If other program folder name is specified during installation, it will replace Utility.<br />

2 From the list displayed, click the name of the scanner to be connected<br />

to, and then Select <strong>Scanner</strong>.<br />

Clicking the Change Display button will change the method of displaying the scanner name.<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> names that will be automatically displayed include only DocumentCentre machines connected<br />

to the same network. To display DocumentCentre machines of other networks, click the Change<br />

Display button and then set the IP address and scanner name.<br />

“3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings” (P. 212) for details on how to change the scanner name<br />

and connect to other networks.


3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

3 Enter the mailbox number (001-200) for saving the documents for<br />

importing at Mailbox No. and the password (within 20 characters) at<br />

Password.<br />

● If the Save Password check box is checked, the password will be saved if it is correct and this<br />

screen will be skipped the next time the Mailbox Viewer 2 is activated.<br />

● Clicking Change <strong>Scanner</strong> will return the screen to step 2 and you can re-select the scanner.<br />

4 Click Open Mailbox.<br />

A list of documents saved in the selected mailbox will be displayed.<br />

5 Check the document in the list.<br />

To delete document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

The On-line Help displayed by clicking the Help button for details on each option of the mailbox<br />

viewer.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

207


Scanning With Mailbox 208<br />

3<br />

3.6<br />

Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Utility Settings<br />

Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility consists of the network scanner driver and the mailbox viewer.<br />

This section describes the procedure to change the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility settings.<br />

3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings<br />

Configuring how to display scanner name<br />

When selecting the scanner, you can change the way to display the scanner<br />

name shown in the list.<br />

You can configure the setting on the dialog box displayed by clicking the Change<br />

Display button on the dialog box for selecting the scanner to be connected.


3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Use network Selecting this item will search the scanners in the following<br />

order. When the host name in respect of the IP address of<br />

the connected scanner has been set, it will be displayed as a<br />

scanner name.<br />

1 “Hosts” file (without extension) in Windows system directory<br />

● The Hosts file is in \Windows for Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Window Me, in \Winnt\System32\drivers\etc for Windows NT<br />

4.0, Windows 2000, and in \Windows\system32\drivers\etc for<br />

Windows XP. However, the directory name in which Windows is<br />

installed may differ according to the environment used.<br />

● To display the host name using the Hosts file, open the Hosts file<br />

with programs like Notepad, and separate the IP address and<br />

the host name by adding a line.<br />

2 DNS (Domain Name Server)<br />

The domain name is also displayed when registering with<br />

DNS. When the corresponding host name is not registered, it<br />

is displayed as “Machine Name (IP address)”.<br />

Use local file When this item is selected and the file is specified, the host<br />

name described by the file is displayed as the scanner name.<br />

Describe the file to be specified, in the same format as the<br />

Hosts file format.<br />

Example:<br />

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx DocumentCentre C400 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Other network scanners When you connect to scanners in other networks, configure<br />

the setting as follows:<br />

In order to connect to scanners in other networks, communication<br />

by TCP/IP is needed.<br />

1 Check the Display other network scanners check box,<br />

and then click the Add button.<br />

2<br />

Enter the IP address of the scanner to be connected to<br />

and the corresponding scanner name in the following dialog<br />

box, and then click the OK button.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

209


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

210<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Configuring how to import scanned data<br />

You can change the way of importing and displaying documents when importing<br />

documents from the mailbox.<br />

Configure the way to import documents from the dialog box displayed by clicking<br />

the Setting button on the dialog box for selecting the documents to be imported.<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Import Order Specifies the order of importing documents.<br />

When New → Old is set, documents will be imported from<br />

the bottom document if Display Mode is set as By file and<br />

from the last page of the bottom document if set as By page.<br />

When Old → New is set, the order will be reversed.<br />

Display Mode Sets whether to display the scanned documents in the mailbox<br />

by file or by page. When the application program used<br />

does not support documents with multiple pages, select By<br />

page to import the pages one by one.<br />

Negative Image Reverses the white and black portions of black and white<br />

images. Use this feature when you want the document<br />

imported from the application program to be a negative<br />

image.<br />

Settings are invalid in the case of images read as full color images<br />

or grayscale images.<br />

Add Display Items Add the following items to the Document Settings screen.<br />

The added items may not be displayed depending on the<br />

machine model.<br />

File Name<br />

Location: The sender's Email address on the Email Document.


3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Temporary Save as Specifies the temporary directory for saving documents in<br />

the process of being imported. If possible, specify a directory<br />

with a large capacity.<br />

In order to connect to scanners in other networks, communication<br />

by TCP/IP is needed. When the network scanner driver is used<br />

together with Able Model PR II or DocumentCentre Series scanner<br />

drivers, use their respective specific directories for Temporary<br />

save. If the same directory is used, the scanner drivers may not<br />

function correctly.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

211


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

212<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings<br />

You can configure how to operate the mailbox viewer and the import features.<br />

To configure these settings, click the Setting button on the Mailbox Viewer dialog<br />

box.<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Get information when<br />

opening Windows<br />

Retrieves the document information of the mailbox when the<br />

Mailbox Viewer dialog box is opened from the task bar.<br />

Update Time Specifies the interval to retrieve document information in the<br />

mailbox.<br />

The range of setting is 1 to 60 minutes.<br />

Import existing files when<br />

updating<br />

Imports all documents when retrieving document information<br />

in the mailbox.<br />

Checking this check box will change the Update button in the<br />

Mailbox Viewer dialog box to Import button. Also, the Import<br />

Settings button becomes enabled.<br />

Refer to the following page for details on the import settings.<br />

Notice mode Specifies how to notify that new documents have been created<br />

at the time of updating when the Mailbox Viewer is minimized<br />

in the taskbar.<br />

Animation: Notifies by change of icon.<br />

Sound: Notifies by sound.<br />

Can also specify WAV file.<br />

If your computer is not installed with a sound card, WAV files<br />

cannot be specified.<br />

Display File Type Sets the type of documents to be displayed in the Mailbox<br />

Viewer dialog box.<br />

Scanned Image: Documents imported by this machine.<br />

Received Fax: Faxed documents received from other fax<br />

machines.<br />

Stored for Polling: Documents saved for polling.<br />

Received Email: Documents received from outside by E-mail.<br />

Add Display Items Add the following items to the Document Settings screen.<br />

The added items may not be displayed depending on the<br />

machine model.<br />

File Name<br />

Location: The sender’s Email address on the Email Document.


Import Settings<br />

Configures how to import scanned data.<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Import Order Select the order of importing images.<br />

When Old to New is selected, documents will be imported<br />

from the bottom. Conversely, when New to Old is selected,<br />

the order will be reversed.<br />

Compress Format: B&W All the pages of the imported document will be saved as<br />

TIFF files. Select the compression type from MMR or MH.<br />

Compress Format: Gray/<br />

Color<br />

Compress Rate: Gray/<br />

Color<br />

Select whether or not to compress. The only format available<br />

is JPEG.<br />

This setting will not be available when compressing image<br />

imported from a network scanner.<br />

Good quality, large size: Data size increases but image quality<br />

improves.<br />

Standard: Standard compression rate.<br />

Poor quality, small size: Image quality deteriorates but data<br />

size decreases.<br />

Saving method Save multi-page as a file: Saves multi-page as TIFF.<br />

Save each page as a file: Saves each page as a file inside<br />

the folder. Black and white pages will be saved as single<br />

page TIFF format. Will be saved as JPEG format when Compress<br />

(JPEG) has been selected for Compress Format:<br />

Gray/Color and as BMP format when Do not compress has<br />

been selected.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

213


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

214<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Adding to Folder Name The file and folder names are as follows:<br />

File Name, location...: File name or location - IP address of<br />

scanner - File No. - Date/Time<br />

Entered string, IP address..: Specified string - IP address of<br />

scanner device - File No. -<br />

Date/Time<br />

Save in Specifies the location to save the imported documents.<br />

Select a drive with a large capacity.


4Scanning With Job<br />

Template<br />

4.1 How to Scan................................................................................... 216<br />

4.1.1 Flow of Scanning ............................................................ 216<br />

4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template) ................... 216<br />

4.2 Printing Job Template List.............................................................. 218


Scanning With Job Template<br />

4<br />

216<br />

4.1<br />

How to Scan<br />

This section describes how to scan using Job Template.<br />

4.1.1 Flow of Scanning<br />

The flow of scanning using Job Template is as follows:<br />

1 Loading documents<br />

● Step 1 of “4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)” (P. 216)<br />

2<br />

Specifying Job Template and then scanning the document.<br />

● Steps 2 to 5 of “4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)” (P. 216)<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)<br />

Procedure<br />

Specify the file (Job Template) with settings like the import settings and transfer<br />

server information, and then scan the document.<br />

The scanned data will be changed to TIFF or JPEG format and then automatically<br />

transferred to the server. The Job Template will use the Job Template Utility<br />

of CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Scanning Services and will be<br />

created on the computer and then saved in the server. This machine will automatically<br />

retrieve the job template saved in the server.<br />

● CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

● CentreWare Internet Services help for details on the CentreWare Internet Services. You can display<br />

help by selecting Job Templates in the CWIS screen and then clicking on help.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.


2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Select Job Template.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

4.1 How to Scan<br />

If the Job Template button is not displayed on the screen, see “1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template”<br />

(P. 133) to check the settings.<br />

4 Select the job template with the needed import settings.<br />

If any created job template is still not displayed, select the Refresh button.<br />

Selecting the Template Description button can display description of the job template. However, if no<br />

explanation has been added when creating the job template, nothing will be displayed.<br />

5 Press Start.<br />

The document will be scanned and the scanned data stored in the hard disk and then automatically<br />

transferred to the server.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Job Template<br />

001 K Test 002 Ha Test<br />

003 Hi Test<br />

004 E Test<br />

Refresh<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 250)<br />

Template<br />

Description<br />

Scanning With Job Template<br />

4<br />

217


Scanning With Job Template<br />

4<br />

218<br />

4.2<br />

Printing Job Template List<br />

This section describes how to print out the Job Template List on this machine.<br />

The Job Template List contains settings of the server used for storing the job template and<br />

which is set by CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

Print out the Job Template List via the touch panel display.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on using the printer.


5E-mail Scanning<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail ......................................... 220<br />

5.1.1 Requirements ................................................................. 220<br />

5.1.2 Scan and Mail................................................................. 220<br />

5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory............................................... 223


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

220<br />

5.1<br />

Scanning Document to<br />

Send as E-mail<br />

You can scan document and send it as an e-mail at the same time using this machine. This<br />

feature is known as “E-mail Scanning”. You can also set the maximum size of the e-mail.<br />

● You need to install the optional E-mail Kit on this machine in order to use the E-mail Scanning feature.<br />

● Scanned documents cannot be printed.<br />

5.1.1 Requirements<br />

To send the document as an e-mail, you need to set up the following. Check with<br />

your system administrator or network administrator to check if the settings have<br />

been configured.<br />

Setting network environment and mail server<br />

● registering user account<br />

● setting mail server<br />

“4.7 E-mail Printing” (P. 91) of “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on setting the mail server.<br />

5.1.2 Scan and Mail<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to scan a document and e-mail it is as follows:<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.


3 Under Save to, select E-mail.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

The E-mail screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

E-mail<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Mailbox... Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template...<br />

Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

4 Specify the recipient of the scanned data.<br />

The options to specify are as follows:<br />

■When the contents is Same as Sender:<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

Item Description<br />

Default<br />

value<br />

To Enter the e-mail address. You can also use the dial directory.<br />

Not Set<br />

Subject Enter the subject of the mail. Auto Set<br />

From Register the name of the sender. This sender’s name will<br />

appear on the Send Header and Cover Note.<br />

Machine Email<br />

Address<br />

Reply To Enter the e-mail address of the recipient. Same as<br />

Sender<br />

Errors-To Specify whether to send an Error Mail when the data cannot<br />

be sent due to a wrong address being set or an error<br />

that occurred.<br />

E-mail<br />

To: (Not Set)<br />

Subject: (Auto Set)<br />

From: (Not Set)<br />

Reply To: (Same as Sender)<br />

Errors-To: (Same as Sender)<br />

Cancel<br />

Same as<br />

Sender<br />

Selecting Same as Sender will set the contents similar to the sender.<br />

Menu<br />

Save<br />

Same as<br />

Sender<br />

Open<br />

Address Book<br />

Keyboard<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

221


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

222<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

■When using address list:<br />

Select Open Address Book.<br />

Selecting Enter Number and then using the numeric keypad to enter the speed dial number at Go to will<br />

display the specified number at the beginning of the dial directory list. You also specify the index on the<br />

screen displayed by clicking the ABCDE, FGHIJ, KLMNO, PQRST, UVWXYZ, 0 – 9 tabs.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Address:<br />

001 <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> 002 Akira Endo 003<br />

004<br />

007<br />

005<br />

008<br />

Only the address for e-mail can be used.<br />

“5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory” (P. 223) for details on setting the dial directory.<br />

■When using the keyboard to enter:<br />

Select Keyboard.<br />

The display might differ according to the ROM versions.<br />

Using the keyboard, enter the characters.<br />

5 Select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

6 If necessary, configure the scan settings.<br />

006<br />

009<br />

010 011 012<br />

Cancel<br />

Address List ABCDE FGHIJ KLMNO PQRST UVWXYZ 0-9<br />

Alphabet<br />

Symbol<br />

a<br />

h<br />

o<br />

v<br />

b<br />

i<br />

p<br />

w<br />

c<br />

j<br />

q<br />

x<br />

d<br />

k<br />

r<br />

y<br />

e<br />

l<br />

s<br />

z<br />

Cancel<br />

“3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” (P. 160) for details on configuring the scan settings.<br />

f<br />

m<br />

t<br />

7 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be sent to the specified recipient.<br />

g<br />

n<br />

u<br />

@<br />

+<br />

/<br />

.<br />

-<br />

<<br />

_<br />

=<br />

><br />

Save<br />

Go to<br />

(001-500)<br />

Save<br />

Backspace<br />

Shift


5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory<br />

Registering directory<br />

Procedure<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Settings screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed.<br />

● The System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed if the system administrator<br />

password has been set. If the password has not been set, pressing the Password/System Settings<br />

button will display the System Settings screen.<br />

● If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering<br />

the password. After the password has been entered, selecting the System Settings button will display<br />

the System Settings screen.<br />

2 Select Setup Menu.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Address Book.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The Address Book screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Mailbox Address Book<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

223


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

224<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

4 Select the preferred address number, followed by Create/Delete.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />

also use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit dial number to Go to to specify the address number<br />

directly.<br />

Address Book<br />

Address No. Address<br />

001<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

002<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

003<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

004<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 (Not in Use)<br />

The Address Number NNN – Create/Delete screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select E-mail and then Detailed Settings.<br />

Adrress Number 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Address Type E-mail Address<br />

Fax<br />

1111<br />

Recipient Name<br />

iFAX<br />

1111<br />

Index<br />

E-mail<br />

1111<br />

6 Select the option for registering, followed by Change Settings.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. E-mail Address (Not Set)<br />

2. Recipient Name<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

3. Index<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

■1. E-mail Address<br />

Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.<br />

■2. Recipient Name<br />

Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.<br />

■3. Index<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001-500)<br />

Create/Delete<br />

Close<br />

Detailed<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.


Changing/Deleting the registered contents<br />

Procedure<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Settings screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed.<br />

● The System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed if the system administrator<br />

password has been set. If the password has not been set, pressing the Password/System Settings button<br />

will display the System Settings screen.<br />

● If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password. After the password has been entered, selecting the System Settings button will display the<br />

System Settings screen.<br />

2 Select Setup Menu.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Address Book.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The Address Book screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Mailbox Address Book<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

225


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

226<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

4 Select the address number to change or delete, followed by Create/<br />

Delete.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />

also use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit dial number to Go to to specify the address number<br />

directly.<br />

Address Book<br />

Address No. Address<br />

001<br />

soumu@mail.net<br />

002<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

003<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

004<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 (Not in Use)<br />

The Address Number NNN – Create/Delete screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select E-mail and then Detailed Settings.<br />

Adrress Number 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Address Type E-mail Address<br />

soumu@mail.net<br />

Fax<br />

1111<br />

Recipient Name<br />

iFAX<br />

1111<br />

Index<br />

E-mail<br />

S1111<br />

6 ■When changing the registered contents:<br />

Select the item to change, followed by Change Settings.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. E-mail Address soumu@mail.net<br />

2. Recipient Name<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

3. Index<br />

S<br />

“Registering directory” (P. 223) for details on the procedure.<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001-500)<br />

Create/Delete<br />

Close<br />

Detailed<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change<br />

Settings


5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

■When deleting all items of the registered contents:<br />

1<br />

Select Reset All Settings.<br />

Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. E-mail Address soumu@mail.net<br />

2. Recipient Name<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

3. Index<br />

S<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

2<br />

Check the contents on the screen, and then select Yes.<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of step 1.<br />

Address Number 001 - Cleate/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items<br />

All settings in Address Number 001 will be reset.<br />

1.Address (E-mail Add)<br />

2.Recipient Are you Name sure?<br />

3.Index<br />

Yes No<br />

All the contents of the selected speed dial number will be deleted.<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

7 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Close<br />

Close<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change Settings<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

227


Part 3 Appendix


1Appendix<br />

A Main Specifications ........................................................................ 232<br />

A.1 Product Specifications .................................................... 232<br />

A.2 Printable Area................................................................. 233<br />

A.3 Internal Fonts.................................................................. 234<br />

A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring)..................................... 235<br />

B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong> Settings (System Administration Mode)............... 236<br />

C Precautions/Limitations.................................................................. 237<br />

C.1 SMB................................................................................ 237<br />

C.2 TCP/IP (LPD).................................................................. 239<br />

C.3 NetWare.......................................................................... 241<br />

C.4 Scan Features ................................................................ 244<br />

C.5 Print Auditron .................................................................. 245<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB ................................................ 246<br />

D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong> ........................................................ 246<br />

D.2 Cannot Print.................................................................... 247<br />

D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong> Window........... 247<br />

D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver............................. 248<br />

E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP............................................. 249<br />

E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me.................. 249<br />

E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP ....... 250<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare .......................................... 251<br />

F.1 When Not Printed ........................................................... 251<br />

F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears ............................ 254<br />

F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained...................... 254<br />

F.4 No Notification ................................................................ 255<br />

G Troubleshooting for CentreWare Internet Services ........................ 256<br />

H Automatic Gradation Adjustment ................................................... 257<br />

I Glossary......................................................................................... 258<br />

J Q & A ............................................................................................. 260


Appendix<br />

232<br />

A Main<br />

Specifications<br />

This section describes the main specifications of the printing feature.<br />

A.1 Product Specifications<br />

Type Console<br />

Laser printer<br />

Printing system Semiconductor laser system<br />

Xerography<br />

Printing speed Conditions: A4<br />

(continuous printing of same contents)<br />

• For DocumentCentre C400 40 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />

22 sheets/minute (color)<br />

• For DocumentCentre C320 32 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />

16 sheets/minute (color)<br />

• For DocumentCentre C240 24 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />

13 sheets/minute (color)<br />

Warm-up time About 45 seconds<br />

(temperature at 20°C, 60% humidity)<br />

Resolution Color: 600 dpi, Black/White: 1,200 dpi<br />

(For text printing, equivalent to 2,400 dpi)<br />

We regret that improvements in specifications/appearance of the product may be made without prior<br />

notice.


A.2 Printable Area<br />

The print area when using PCL printer driver for printing is as follows:<br />

For non-standard sizes and sizes smaller than A3:<br />

A Main Specifications<br />

For non-standard sizes, the left and right unprintable areas becomes 4.5 mm when the width of the<br />

paper is 306 mm or more.<br />

For 12×18":<br />

Appendix<br />

233


Appendix<br />

234<br />

A Main Specifications<br />

A.3 Internal Fonts<br />

The following fonts can be used for normal operations.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />

optional PostScript fonts.<br />

Stroke fonts (for HP-GL/2 only)<br />

● European stroke fonts<br />

Outline fonts<br />

The relationship between the installed outline fonts and the Page Description<br />

Languages or emulation mode is as follows.<br />

In addition, the installed outline fonts cannot be used for PostScript (option) for<br />

normal operations.<br />

■Europian<br />

CG Times LetterGothic CourierPS<br />

CG Times It LetterGothic It CourierPS Ob<br />

CG Times Bd LetterGothic Bd CourierPS Bd<br />

CG Times BdIt Albertus Md CourierPS BdOb<br />

Univers Md Albertus XBd SymbolPS<br />

Univers MdIt Clarendon Cd Palatino Roman<br />

Univers Bd Coronet Palatino It<br />

Univers BdIt Marigold Palatino Bd<br />

Univers MdCd Arial Palatino BdIt<br />

Univers MdCdIt Arial It ITCBookman Lt<br />

Univers BdCd Arial Bd ITCBookman LtIt<br />

Univers BdCdIt Arial BdIt ITCBookmanDm<br />

AntiqueOlv Times New ITCBookmanDm It<br />

AntiqueOlv It Times New It HelveticaNr<br />

AntiqueOlv Bd Times New Bd HelveticaNr Ob<br />

CG Omega Times New BdIt HelveticaNr Bd<br />

CG Omega It Symbol HelveticaNrBdOb<br />

CG Omega Bd Windings N C Schbk Roman<br />

CG Omega BdIt Line <strong>Printer</strong> N C Schbk It<br />

GaramondAntiqua Times Roman N C Schbk Bd<br />

Garamond Krsv Times It N C Schbk BdIt


Garamond Hlb Times Bd ITC A G Go Bk<br />

GaramondKrsvHlb Times BdIt ITC A G Go BkOb<br />

Courier Helvetica ITC A G Go Dm<br />

Courier It Helvetica Ob ITC A G Go DmOb<br />

Courier Bd Helvetica Bd ZapfC MdIt<br />

Courier BdIt Helvetica BdOb ZapfCDingbats<br />

A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring)<br />

This section describes the optional interface board (for Token Ring).<br />

Shape of the connector<br />

Pin arrangement<br />

STP connector specifications<br />

Pin No. Name Pin No. Name<br />

1 RX-A 6 RX-B<br />

2 N.C. 7 N.C.<br />

3 N.C. 8 N.C.<br />

4 N.C. 9 TX-A<br />

5 TX-B -<br />

UTP connector specifications<br />

Pin No. Name Pin No. Name<br />

1 N.C. 5 RX-A<br />

2 N.C. 6 TX-B<br />

3 TX-A 7 N.C.<br />

4 RX-B 8 N.C.<br />

A Main Specifications<br />

Appendix<br />

235


Appendix<br />

236<br />

B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Settings<br />

(System Administration<br />

Mode)<br />

The various printer/scanner settings can be changed in the System Administration Mode to<br />

make them easier to use.<br />

See “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on System Administration Mode and the options that can be set.


C Precautions/Limitations<br />

C.1 SMB<br />

The precautions/limitations of using SMB are as follows:<br />

Setting up of this machine<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Depending on the network environment used, it may be necessary to set the<br />

subnet mask and gateway. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

the needed item.<br />

● If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may<br />

be set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled<br />

when it is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />

● Specify the size for the receive buffer memory (SMB Spool) as required by the<br />

environment in use. If the size of the receive buffer memory (SMB Spool) is<br />

smaller than the transmitted data, the data may not be received.<br />

Setting up of host machine<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Consult the Network Information Service (NIS) administrator when setting network<br />

(such as IP address) by a host being used under NIS.<br />

Switching off power<br />

Take note of the following points when switching off the power of this machine:<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Memory<br />

All print data spooled to the printer memory, including data in the process of<br />

printing, will be deleted. When the power is switched on again, the print data will<br />

not be found.<br />

However, if the power is switched off immediately after the print data has been<br />

sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />

power is switched on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />

print data has been sent.<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Hard Disk<br />

All print data spooled to the hard disk of this machine, including data in the process<br />

of printing, will be saved. When the power is turned on again, the stored<br />

print data will be printed first even if new print data has been sent.<br />

Appendix<br />

237


Appendix<br />

238<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

All print data spooled to the receive buffer of this machine, including data in the<br />

process of printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print<br />

data will not be found. However, if the power is turned off immediately after the<br />

print data has been sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this<br />

case, when the power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first<br />

even if new print data has been sent.<br />

During printing<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Hard Disk or Memory<br />

If the print data is larger than the hard disk or the remaining memory capacity at<br />

the point of receiving print data, the data will not be received.<br />

When the print data has exceeded the receiving capacity, some host devices may re-send the data<br />

immediately. When this occurs, the host device appears as if it has crashed. To rectify the situation,<br />

stop the host device from sending print data.<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

If the machine has accepted a print request from a host device, it cannot accept<br />

any print request from other host device.<br />

■When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed<br />

When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed, it may not<br />

be able to process enquiry or delete request from this machine correctly. Ensure<br />

that this machine is free of print data in the receive buffer, and then turn the<br />

power off/on.<br />

You can use the printer control panel to stop/eject print data spooled to the receive buffer of this<br />

machine. For details on the way to do this, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) or “3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 58)<br />

of “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

■Deleting jobs<br />

For Windows NT 4.0 not installed with Service Pack 4 and later, you cannot<br />

delete jobs. If you delete jobs while the computer is receiving data, an error message<br />

will be displayed. In this case, the Retry button on the error message dialog<br />

box will not be effective.


C.2 TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

The precautions/limitations of using TCP/IP (LPD) are as follows:<br />

Setting up this machine<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Depending on the network environment used, it may be necessary to set the subnet<br />

mask and gateway. Consult your network administrator before defining the<br />

needed item.<br />

● If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may<br />

be set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled<br />

when it is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />

● Specify the size for the receive buffer memory (LPD spool) as required by the<br />

environment in use. If the size of the receive buffer memory (LPD spool) is<br />

smaller than the transmitted data, the data may not be received.<br />

Setting up host machine<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Consult the Network Information Service (NIS) administrator when setting network<br />

(such as IP address) by a host being used under NIS.<br />

Switching off power<br />

Take note of the following points when turning off the power of this machine:<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Memory<br />

All print data spooled to the printer memory, including data in the process of<br />

printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print data will<br />

not be found.<br />

However, if the power is turned off immediately after the print data has been<br />

sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />

power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />

print data has been sent.<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Hard Disk<br />

All print data spooled to the hard disk of this machine, including data in the process<br />

of printing, will be saved. When the power is turned on again, the stored<br />

print data will be printed first even if new print data has been sent.<br />

Appendix<br />

239


Appendix<br />

240<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

All print data spooled to the receive buffer of this machine, including data in the<br />

process of printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print<br />

data will not be found.<br />

However, if the power is turned off immediately after the print data has been<br />

sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />

power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />

print data has been sent.<br />

During printing<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Hard Disk or Memory<br />

If the print data is larger than the hard disk or the remaining memory capacity at<br />

the point of receiving print data, the data will not be received.<br />

When the print data has exceeded the receiving capacity, some host devices may re-send the data<br />

immediately. When this occurs, the host device appears as if it has crashed. To rectify the situation,<br />

stop the host device from sending print data.<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

If the machine has accepted a print request from a host device, it cannot accept<br />

any print request from other host device.<br />

■When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed<br />

When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed, it may not<br />

be able to process enquiry or delete request from this machine correctly. Ensure<br />

that this machine is free of print data in the receive buffer, and then turn the<br />

power off/on.<br />

You can use the touch panel display to stop/eject print data spooled to the receive buffer of this<br />

machine. For details on the way to do this, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) or “3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 58) of<br />

“Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.


C.3 NetWare<br />

The precautions/limitations of using NetWare are as follows:<br />

During setting up<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■Setting up of this machine<br />

If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may be<br />

set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled when it<br />

is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />

■Setting up environment for PCONSOLE<br />

Take note of the following points when setting up environment using PCON-<br />

SOLE:<br />

Item For PServer Mode<br />

No. of file server Up to 16 servers<br />

No. of print queue Up to 48 queues<br />

No. of notifying candidate Up to 48 users<br />

No. of password character Up to 32 characters<br />

If 33 or more characters are used for the password, printing cannot be carried out.<br />

■Using bindery reference queue (for directory service/PServer mode)<br />

This machine does not support bindery reference queue. As such, printing with<br />

bindery reference queue is not allowed.<br />

Appendix<br />

241


Appendix<br />

242<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

During printing<br />

■When using CAPTURE/NPRINT<br />

There are optional features not supported by NetWare.<br />

: Supported (features of this machine)<br />

*<br />

: Features of the file server or workstation<br />

× : Not supported<br />

Option PServer<br />

CAPTURE NPRINT Mode<br />

SHow ⎯ *<br />

NOTify / NoNOTIfy NOTify / NoNOTIfy<br />

TImeout ⎯ *<br />

AUtoendcap /<br />

NoAutoendcap<br />

⎯ *<br />

Local = n ⎯ *<br />

⎯ PrintServer =<br />

Server = Server = *<br />

Queue = Queue = *<br />

Create = ⎯ *<br />

Job = Job = *<br />

Keep ⎯ *<br />

Form = n Form = n<br />

Copies = n Copies = n<br />

Remarks<br />

⎯ Delete *<br />

Tabs = n / NoTabs Tabs = n / NoTabs × Cannot guarantee correct<br />

printing<br />

Banner /NoBanner Banner /NoBanner ×<br />

FormFeed /<br />

NoFormFeed<br />

CONversion /<br />

NoCONversion<br />

FormFeed /<br />

NoFormFeed<br />

CONversion /<br />

NoCONversion<br />

JApanese / ENglish Japanese / ENglish ×<br />

■When printing with Windows application programs<br />

When the setting to print at High Speed is invalid, printing may not be done correctly.<br />

When you print from Windows application program, enable the High<br />

Speed setting.<br />

×<br />

×


Print control time<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■When using PSC/PCONSOLE<br />

Take note of the following points when carrying out print control using PSC/<br />

PCONSOLE with directory service or bindery service.<br />

There are optional features not supported by NetWare.<br />

: Supported (features of this machine)<br />

× : Not supported<br />

Parameter PServer<br />

PSC PCONSOLE Mode<br />

STATus ⎯<br />

Remarks<br />

PAUse <strong>Printer</strong> Pause In print server mode, the status<br />

of this machine becomes<br />

Stop.<br />

ABort Abort Job<br />

STOp [Keep] <strong>Printer</strong> Stop =<br />

STARt <strong>Printer</strong> Start<br />

--- <strong>Printer</strong> Rewind<br />

MArk Paper Tip Mark ×<br />

FormFeed Form Feed ×<br />

MOuntForm=n Load Paper<br />

PRIvate ⎯ ×<br />

SHared ⎯ ×<br />

CancelDown ⎯ ×<br />

Appendix<br />

243


Appendix<br />

244<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

C.4 Scan Features<br />

The precautions/limitations of using the scan features are as follows:<br />

The “Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Readme.txt” in the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM for details on<br />

the precautions/limitations on the network scanner driver and mailbox viewer.<br />

When retrieving documents from mailbox<br />

Display<br />

● When Delete/Save Documents is set to Save, the same document can be<br />

accessed by multiple clients.<br />

● When Delete/Save Documents is set to Delete, the number of multiple clients<br />

that can access the same document is only one. The document which is being<br />

saved or imported by a client cannot be seen from other clients.<br />

In both cases, you can add documents to the mailbox which is being accessed.<br />

When a document with many colors is scanned, the image cannot be displayed<br />

in the correct colors if the display mode does not support the display of the number<br />

of colors scanned. Use the display mode which supports the display of the<br />

number of colors scanned or more.<br />

Using network scanner driver and mailbox viewer simultaneously<br />

You cannot use the network scanner driver and mailbox viewer together from<br />

one computer to connect to this machine.<br />

When retrieving documents from multiple computers, you can retrieve documents<br />

from up to three of the same machine at the same time using the network<br />

scanner driver or mailbox viewer 2 by multiple computers.<br />

When printing documents saved in the mailbox<br />

When Mailbox is selected, only fax documents can be printed when printing<br />

saved documents using the touch panel display. Scanned documents cannot be<br />

printed.<br />

When polling from other fax machines<br />

When the machine is polled from other fax machines, scanned documents cannot<br />

be sent.<br />

When using TIFF files<br />

The TIFF files created by using Job Template or the mailbox viewer will be compressed<br />

to MMR or MH format. To open TIFF files, use an application program<br />

which supports these compression formats.


Restriction on scanning capacity<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

The maximum scanning capacity of one page is 297 × 432 mm. For standard<br />

sizes, it is A3 or 11 × 17".<br />

Number of sheets of documents for scanning (using mailbox)<br />

Using mailbox, the number of sheets of documents which can be scanned at one<br />

time is 999 pages. The number of sheets for scanning may change according to<br />

the document size and resolution.<br />

C.5 Print Auditron<br />

The precautions/limitations for using Print Auditron are as follows.<br />

● When the PS driver is being used for shared printers, the Print Auditron does<br />

not function properly. Install the printer driver on each of the client PCs that will<br />

be using Print Auditron on the PS driver.<br />

● When using the PCL driver on a printer with a shared server, turn off the EMF.<br />

If it is turned on operations will not be correct due to transmission of faulty information.<br />

● When changing the setting for Specify Job Owner in the printer driver, enter the<br />

password again. Operations may not be correct due to unintended information<br />

being transmitted if the previously set password is used as is.<br />

Appendix<br />

245


Appendix<br />

246<br />

D Troubleshooting<br />

When<br />

Using SMB<br />

This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />

actions for errors which may occur when using SMB.<br />

D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Transport protocol of the host<br />

device and this machine is different.<br />

There are multiple browsers.<br />

The network (subnet) is wrong.<br />

Name search of the host name<br />

is not working correctly (when<br />

transport protocol is TCP/IP).<br />

Host name specified on this<br />

machine already exists.<br />

On the host device, you can find<br />

the printer when it has been<br />

searched as “another computer”<br />

(Start > Find > Computer) but<br />

not when searched in the Network<br />

Neighborhood.<br />

When the PING command is<br />

issued, specifying the IP<br />

address of this machine gets a<br />

response but not when specifying<br />

the host name.<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List, and check if the status of<br />

SMB indicates “repetitive host<br />

name”.<br />

↑<br />

↑<br />

Specify similar protocol for SMB<br />

for host device and this machine.<br />

When there are multiple host<br />

devices within the same workgroup,<br />

change the Auto Master<br />

Mode in the SMB setting file,<br />

config.txt to Off.<br />

When this machine and the host<br />

device is in a different network,<br />

consult your system administrator.<br />

Check the settings of the SMB<br />

setting file, config.txt (WINS 1st<br />

server, WINS 2nd server, Subnet<br />

mask) with the settings on<br />

the host device (e.g. WINS,<br />

DNS, LMHOST).<br />

Change the Host name of the<br />

SMB setting file, config.txt to<br />

another name not in use.<br />

Also, either change the host<br />

name used by CentreWare Internet<br />

Services to another name<br />

not in use or reset this machine<br />

to default settings.


D.2 Cannot Print<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

This machine is processing print<br />

request from other host devices<br />

(for non-spool mode only).<br />

Exceeded the maximum number<br />

of connections of this<br />

machine.<br />

The user name and password is<br />

not correctly set at the printer<br />

properties when using the<br />

Auditron feature.<br />

Check if this machine is processing<br />

printing. (An error message<br />

about insufficient storing space<br />

for waiting print jobs is displayed.)<br />

Check if this machine is processing<br />

requests (e.g. print requests,<br />

status enquiry) from multiple host<br />

devices simultaneously. (An error<br />

message about remote computer<br />

cannot be used is displayed.)<br />

On the Configuration tab of the<br />

the printer properties, check the<br />

setting of Specify Job Owner.<br />

After this machine has completed<br />

the processing, either send a<br />

print request or switch to spool<br />

mode on this machine.<br />

Wait for a while, and then send<br />

print request again. Or increase<br />

the value of Maximum Sessions<br />

on the SMB setting file, config.txt,<br />

and then reboot this machine.<br />

Specify the correct user name<br />

and password at Specify Job<br />

Owner.<br />

D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Window<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Tried to delete all documents<br />

displayed in the <strong>Printer</strong> window<br />

(only possible for system administrator).<br />

Check if you are trying to delete<br />

print jobs from the <strong>Printer</strong> menu<br />

(Clear print jobs menu).<br />

Owner of print job is not correct. Check if the Owner of the select<br />

print job is similar to the name<br />

used for login to Windows.<br />

Service Pack 4.0 and later is not<br />

installed.<br />

(For Windows NT 4.0)<br />

Check the version of the Service<br />

Pack displayed when Windows<br />

NT 4.0 is activated.<br />

Select the print job you want to<br />

delete and then cancel it from<br />

the Document menu of the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> window (Cancel Printing<br />

menu).<br />

Login to Windows again using<br />

the name of the Owner of the<br />

print job and then delete the print<br />

job.<br />

Install Service Pack 4.0 or later.<br />

Appendix<br />

247


Appendix<br />

248<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB<br />

D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Auto download feature is not<br />

working.<br />

Different printer drivers are<br />

saved.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver is not saved within<br />

two levels from the Drivers<br />

folder.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver is not saved in a<br />

folder which is named within<br />

eight alphanumeric characters.<br />

Check the Auto Driver Download<br />

setting of the SMB setting file,<br />

config.txt (only possible for system<br />

administrator).<br />

Check the printer type to see if<br />

the correct printer driver is<br />

saved.<br />

Check if the folder containing the<br />

printer driver is within two levels<br />

from the Drivers folder.<br />

Open the driver.txt of the Drivers<br />

folder, and then check if the<br />

message is “The folder name is<br />

not within eight alphanumeric<br />

characters”.<br />

Set the Auto Driver Download in<br />

the SMB setting file, config.txt to<br />

Enable and then reboot the<br />

machine.<br />

After saving the correct printer<br />

driver, reboot the machine.<br />

Save the printer driver in a folder<br />

within two levels from the Drivers<br />

folder, and then reboot the<br />

machine.<br />

Change the folder name to one<br />

using up to eight alphanumeric<br />

characters, and then reboot the<br />

machine.


E Troubleshooting<br />

When<br />

Using TCP/IP<br />

This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />

actions for errors which may occur when using TCP/IP (LPD).<br />

E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me<br />

Cause Status Display/Verification/Action<br />

The machine and host device<br />

are connected to different networks.<br />

An error has occurred in the network<br />

between the host device<br />

and this machine, and the connection<br />

cannot be established.<br />

This machine is switched off<br />

after the host device has sent a<br />

print request. Or the print<br />

request is sent to the machine<br />

when it is switched off.<br />

Print requests from multiple host<br />

devices are sent to this machine<br />

at the same time.<br />

Printing files cannot be spooled<br />

due to insufficient disk capacity<br />

of the host device.<br />

Status “Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Display<br />

Verification Check with the network system administrator to verify<br />

that the network connecting the host device and that<br />

connecting this machine are linked by a router or gateway.<br />

Action Connect this machine directly to the network connecting<br />

the host device.<br />

Status “Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Display<br />

Verification None<br />

Action Ask the network system administrator to check the<br />

network for errors.<br />

Status<br />

Display<br />

“Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Verification Check if this machine is switched on.<br />

Action Switch on this machine.<br />

Status<br />

Display<br />

“Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Verification None<br />

Action None (printing will be re-processed automatically).<br />

Status “Unable to print (Spool Error)”<br />

Display<br />

Verification Open My Computer and right-click the disk (e.g. Cdrive)<br />

installed with the system. Select Properties from<br />

the menu displayed and then check the free space<br />

available.<br />

Action After deleting unnecessary files to increase the free<br />

disk space, select Pause Printing from the Document<br />

menu of the <strong>Printer</strong> window to enable printing to<br />

restart.<br />

Appendix<br />

249


Appendix<br />

250<br />

E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP<br />

E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XP<br />

When printer is not printing<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Incorrect IP address is set. Ask the network system administrator<br />

to check if the IP address<br />

of this machine is correct.<br />

When LPD spool is set to Memory,<br />

the print data sent by the<br />

host device in one print request<br />

has exceeded the upper limit of<br />

the receiving capacity.<br />

An irrecoverable error has<br />

occurred during print processing.<br />

The transport protocol is different<br />

from that of the host device.<br />

Data format of the print data to<br />

be processed by this machine is<br />

different from that sent by the<br />

host device.<br />

Check the memory capacity of<br />

LPD spool, and then compare it<br />

with the print data which was<br />

sent in one print request.<br />

Check if there is any error displayed<br />

on the printer control<br />

panel.<br />

Check the selected transport<br />

protocol.<br />

When target print result is not obtained<br />

⎯<br />

Set the correct IP address for<br />

this machine.<br />

1. If the print data is a single file<br />

and exceeding the upper limit<br />

of the memory capacity, split<br />

the file into smaller ones not<br />

exceeding the said upper<br />

limit, and then send for printing.<br />

2. If the print data are multiple<br />

files and have exceeded the<br />

upper limit of the receiving<br />

capacity, reduce the number<br />

of files to be sent for printing<br />

at one time.<br />

Switch the machine off and on.<br />

Switch on the machine only<br />

when there is nothing on the display.<br />

Select the same transport protocol<br />

as that of the host device.<br />

Disable the output function of<br />

Ctrl-D.<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The specified print language is<br />

different from that of the print<br />

data.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver of this machine is<br />

not used (printer driver of other<br />

companies used instead).<br />

Check the specified print language<br />

and that of the print data.<br />

Check that the printer driver of<br />

this machine is selected.<br />

Specify a similar print language<br />

for the print data.<br />

Select the printer driver of this<br />

machine. If it does not appear as<br />

an option, install and select it. If<br />

a printer driver from other company<br />

is used, the machine may<br />

not function properly.


F Troubleshooting<br />

When<br />

Using NetWare<br />

This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />

actions for errors which may occur when using NetWare.<br />

F.1 When Not Printed<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The network component board<br />

(e.g. HUB) is not compatible with<br />

the automatic setting of the<br />

frame type.<br />

There is a breakdown in the network<br />

from the workstation to the<br />

printer.<br />

The user name or group name of<br />

the person sending the job is not<br />

registered in <strong>User</strong> of the print<br />

queue.<br />

Job sending to the print queue is<br />

prohibited.<br />

Check if the data link lamp of the<br />

network component board connected<br />

to this machine is on.<br />

Check if the frame type of the file<br />

server in the network is similar.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the target printer<br />

object can be seen. *<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation<br />

and referring to the target<br />

queue object, check if the user<br />

name or group name of the person<br />

sending the job is registered<br />

in <strong>User</strong>. *<br />

Using PCONSOLE, check if Yes<br />

is set for <strong>User</strong> can register with<br />

the queue at the Current Queue<br />

Status of Print Queue.<br />

Using NWADMIN from workstation,<br />

check if the operator flag is<br />

checked at Recognition of the<br />

target print queue. *<br />

From this machine, set up the<br />

frame type specified to the file<br />

server which you want to connect<br />

to.<br />

Replace the network cable<br />

between the workstation and the<br />

printer that cannot be used for<br />

transmitting data.<br />

1. Re-send the print job to the<br />

print queue with the registered<br />

user name or group<br />

name of the person sending<br />

the job registered in <strong>User</strong> of<br />

Print Queue.<br />

2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />

workstation, register the user<br />

name or group name of the<br />

person sending the job at<br />

<strong>User</strong> of Print Queue*<br />

Using PCONSOLE, set to Yes.<br />

Using NWADMIN from workstation,<br />

check if each item of the<br />

operator flag is checked at Recognition<br />

of the target print<br />

queue. *<br />

Appendix<br />

251


Appendix<br />

252<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The user name or group name of<br />

the person sending the job is not<br />

registered in print server user of<br />

the print queue.<br />

The print queue that sent the<br />

print job is not assigned to the<br />

printer.<br />

The settings of the data format<br />

of print job are not similar to that<br />

of the printing environment of the<br />

workstation.<br />

A print queue which exceeded<br />

the maximum number of supported<br />

queues of the printer has<br />

been set.<br />

The slave file server is not set<br />

(bindery service mode).<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the user name<br />

or group name of the person<br />

sending the job is registered in<br />

<strong>User</strong> of the target print server. *<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the target printer<br />

is assigned to the serviced<br />

printer in the list under <strong>User</strong> of<br />

the target print queue.*<br />

⎯<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the desired print<br />

queue is assigned to the print<br />

queue list under <strong>User</strong> of the target<br />

print. *<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if the slave<br />

file server is registered in Service<br />

NetWare Server under the<br />

print server corresponding to the<br />

Print Server Information. *<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> type is wrong. Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if the following<br />

settings are set under <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Information > <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong><br />

xxx Environment: <strong>Printer</strong>= Parallel,<br />

Port= LPT1, Position= Auto<br />

mode (local).*<br />

The slave file server setting is<br />

wrong (bindery service mode).<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if printer type<br />

is set as Defined under <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Information > <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong><br />

xxx Environment.*<br />

1. Re-send the print job to the<br />

print queue with the registered<br />

user name or group<br />

name of the person sending<br />

the job registered in <strong>User</strong> of<br />

Print Server Information.<br />

2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />

workstation, register the user<br />

name or group name of the<br />

person sending the job at<br />

<strong>User</strong> of the target print<br />

server. *<br />

1. Re-send the print job to a<br />

print queue assigned to the<br />

printer. *<br />

2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />

workstation, add the target<br />

queue as an addition to <strong>User</strong><br />

of the target printer. *<br />

For workstation using Windows,<br />

disable the output function of<br />

Ctrl-D.<br />

Re-send the print job to a print<br />

queue assigned to the printer. *<br />

After registering the slave file<br />

server using PCONSOLE from<br />

the workstation, reflect the setting<br />

parameters.<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, set <strong>Printer</strong>= Parallel,<br />

Port= LPT1, Position= Auto<br />

mode (local) and reflect the setting<br />

parameters. *<br />

If it is not Defined, change it to<br />

Defined and then reflect the setting<br />

parameters.*


The number of paper definition<br />

specified at the print server is<br />

not the same as that of paper<br />

definition set at the print queue.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the paper definition<br />

specified at the print server<br />

is same as that of paper definition<br />

set at the print queue.*<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The level setting for IPX checksum<br />

is wrong.<br />

The level setting for NCP packet<br />

signature is wrong.<br />

The default device name is<br />

wrong.<br />

The directory tree name is not<br />

set.<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, execute a set command<br />

and check if the IPX checksum<br />

is set to level 2.<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, execute a set command<br />

and check if the NCP packet signature<br />

is set to level 3.<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List, and check the lower six<br />

characters (3 bytes) of the Ethernet<br />

address.<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the tree name is<br />

specified.<br />

Context is not set. Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the context is<br />

specified.<br />

Connected to another printer<br />

object.<br />

NetWare port cannot be activated<br />

by setting.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the object is correctly<br />

assigned by the layout<br />

information of the desired print<br />

server. *<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the NetWare<br />

port is activated.<br />

File server is down. Search for the target file server<br />

in Network Neighborhood.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

specify the same number<br />

of paper definition at the<br />

print server as that of paper definition<br />

set at the print queue. *<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, enter the following command<br />

and set the IPX checksum<br />

to level 0 or 1:<br />

set Enable IPX Checksum = x (x:<br />

0 or 1)<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, enter the following command<br />

and after setting the NCP<br />

packet signature to level 0, 1, or<br />

2, restart the file server:<br />

set NCP Packet Signature<br />

Option = x (x: 0, 1, or 2)<br />

1. Set the device name using<br />

the correct Ethernet address.<br />

2. Set the device name to any<br />

name except the default<br />

name.<br />

Set the tree name.<br />

Set the context.<br />

1. Using the PCL Driver/Network<br />

Utility CD-ROM from the<br />

workstation, set the file<br />

server name, tree name, context,<br />

active mode correctly.<br />

2. Using the CentreWare Internet<br />

Services from the workstation,<br />

set the file server<br />

name, tree name, context,<br />

active mode correctly.<br />

Activate the NetWare port.<br />

Activating the file server.<br />

Appendix<br />

253


Appendix<br />

254<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

There are printers with similar<br />

device name on the network.<br />

Switch off the machine and<br />

using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check that the status of<br />

the corresponding printer object<br />

is job waiting.<br />

NetWare port is not activated. Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the network<br />

number when using IPX/SPX is<br />

at “00000000” (NetWare server<br />

down). Also, check if the IP<br />

address when using TCP/IP is at<br />

“0.0.0.0” (fixed IP not set or<br />

address supply server (DHCP)<br />

down).<br />

Using the CentreWare Driver &<br />

Network Utility CD-ROM from<br />

the workstation, set another host<br />

name.<br />

For IPX/SPX, activate NetWare<br />

server. For TCP/IP, set the fixed<br />

IP address or activate the<br />

address supply server (DHCP).<br />

*: Refer to “NetWare Online Documentation” for details on how to set and check.<br />

F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

An error occurs in NetWare. ⎯ Switch the machine off and on.<br />

Switch on the machine only<br />

when there is nothing on the display.<br />

F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The print language of the print<br />

job is different from that set up<br />

on this machine.<br />

Check the print language of this<br />

machine.<br />

Set the same print language for<br />

the print job and this machine.


F.4 No Notification<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

The possible causes, verification methods and recommended actions when<br />

there are no messages on the workstation which have been sent print instructions<br />

are as follows:<br />

No notification of printer errors<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Not registered in the Notify Candidate<br />

List of the print server.<br />

No notification of end of job<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if the user<br />

name and group name of the<br />

person sending the job is registered<br />

in Print Server Information<br />

> <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong> xxx Environment<br />

Settings > Notify.<br />

Register the user name or group<br />

name of the person sending the<br />

job in Notify.<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

When sending jobs from the<br />

workstation, the NOTIFY option<br />

is not specified.<br />

The NetWare CASTOFF utility is<br />

executed on the user workstation.<br />

Check if the NOTIFY option is<br />

specified when sending the print<br />

job.<br />

⎯<br />

Specify the NOTIFY option when<br />

sending the print job.<br />

Execute the NetWare CASTON<br />

utility on the user workstation.<br />

Appendix<br />

255


Appendix<br />

256<br />

G Troubleshooting<br />

for<br />

CentreWare Internet Services<br />

This section describes the causes and recommended actions for errors that occur while<br />

using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Cause Action<br />

Cannot connect to CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

The “Please wait” message is<br />

displayed throughout.<br />

The Refresh button is not working.<br />

Selecting menu in the left frame<br />

does not change the right frame<br />

contents.<br />

Is this machine working properly?<br />

Check if the power of this machine is switched on.<br />

Is CentreWare Internet Services activated?<br />

Print out the System Settings List to check.<br />

Is the Internet address correctly entered?<br />

Check the Internet address again. If cannot be connected, enter the<br />

IP address to make connection.<br />

Is the proxy server being used?<br />

Depending on the proxy server, connections might not be possible.<br />

Without using the proxy server, configure either the browser setting<br />

to “Not using proxy server” or the address to be used to “Not using<br />

proxy server”.<br />

Wait for a while as instructed.<br />

If nothing happens, try clicking the Refresh button.<br />

And even then, if nothing happens, check if this machine is working<br />

properly.<br />

Are you using the specified OS and browser?<br />

See “5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers” (P. 109) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”, and<br />

check if the OS and browser in use can be used.<br />

The screen display is distorted. Change the window size of the browser.<br />

The latest information is not dis- Click the Refresh button.<br />

played.<br />

Characters are not correctly dis- Use Western European language command.<br />

played.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button does not reflect the new<br />

settings.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button will display in the<br />

browser, messages like “The<br />

server has returned ineffective<br />

or unrecognizable response.” or<br />

“No data”.<br />

Is the entered value correct?<br />

If the entered value is not a valid entry, it will change automatically to<br />

an entry within the limit.<br />

Is the password correct?<br />

The entry for Password is not similar to Confirm Password. Enter the<br />

correct password.<br />

Reboot this machine.<br />

Cannot delete job. Wait for a while and then click the Refresh button.


H Automatic<br />

Gradation<br />

Adjustment<br />

When the color gradation of the print image is out, it can be automatically adjusted. Through<br />

this gradation adjustment, the image quality of this machine can be consistently maintained.<br />

“3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on<br />

adjusting the gradation.<br />

Adjusting for printing<br />

When adjusting gradation for the printing of data such as text, select Print Job -<br />

Text.<br />

Auto Gradation Adjustment<br />

Copy Job - Text<br />

Copy Job - Photo<br />

Print Job - Text<br />

Print Job - Photo<br />

When adjusting gradation for the printing of data such as photos, select Print<br />

Job - Photo.<br />

Auto Gradation Adjustment<br />

Copy Job - Text<br />

Copy Job - Photo<br />

Print Job - Text<br />

Print Job - Photo<br />

Close<br />

Start<br />

Close<br />

Start<br />

Appendix<br />

257


Appendix<br />

258<br />

I<br />

A3<br />

420 × 297 mm paper.<br />

A4<br />

297 × 210 mm paper.<br />

A5<br />

210 × 148 mm paper.<br />

B4<br />

364 × 257 mm paper.<br />

B5<br />

257 × 182 mm paper.<br />

Glossary<br />

CMYK<br />

A way of expressing colors in process like<br />

color printing.<br />

It is divided into four colors of Cyan (C),<br />

Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K),<br />

which are layered for printing.<br />

DPI<br />

Stands for Dot Per Inch, which is the number<br />

of dots that can be printed within a width<br />

of 1 inch. Used as the unit for resolution.<br />

ICM<br />

Stands for Image Color Matching, which is<br />

the color management software adopted by<br />

Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XP. It corrects the differences in<br />

color due to devices so that the color of the<br />

print result is similar to that on the screen.<br />

Image Enhancement<br />

Feature which makes the border between<br />

black and white smooth, with rough edges<br />

reduced, giving the appearance of a higher<br />

resolution.<br />

NV Memory<br />

Non-volatile memory which allows the settings<br />

of the printer to be maintained even<br />

when power is off.<br />

RAM<br />

Stands for Random Access Memory, which<br />

is the memory device where information can<br />

be retrieved as well as reduced.<br />

ROM<br />

Stands for Read Only Memory, which is the<br />

memory device specific for the retrieval of<br />

information.<br />

Printable area<br />

The actual area on paper which can be<br />

printed.<br />

Emulation<br />

The ability of the printer to perform the features<br />

of other printers. The mode is called<br />

emulation mode.<br />

Resolution<br />

Expresses the fineness of the image. Usually,<br />

it is expressed by the number of dots<br />

per inch (dpi) so that the larger the value,<br />

the higher the resolution (details can be<br />

reproduced).<br />

Gradation<br />

Refers to the smoothness between colors.<br />

Expresses the number of gradations by the<br />

number of levels, so that the larger the<br />

value, the smoother the colors.<br />

Cut paper<br />

Paper of standard sizes like A4, B5.<br />

Common Menu<br />

The menu for common settings of the print<br />

mode, and consists of Meter Check, Setup,<br />

Report/List, System Settings, Network/Port<br />

Settings, Memory Settings, Initialization/<br />

Data Deletion, Print Settings, and Automatic<br />

Gradation Adjustment.<br />

Gradation<br />

The change in the continuous color density<br />

seen in photos and illustrations.


Receive buffer<br />

Buffer is the location to store data sent from<br />

the client temporarily. By increasing the<br />

memory capacity of the receive buffer, the<br />

client can be freed faster.<br />

Default value<br />

Factory default settings and settings upon<br />

NV memory initialization.<br />

Job<br />

A group of print data. The canceling and<br />

outputting of printing is done on a job basis.<br />

Screen<br />

For devices like printers, the density of<br />

printed matter is expressed in shaded dots,<br />

and the column of these dots or number of<br />

lines during printing are known as screen<br />

lines. Gradations which can be displayed<br />

change according to the number of screen<br />

lines.<br />

Protocol<br />

Rules of communication necessary for carrying<br />

out data transmission.<br />

Print page buffer<br />

Location where print data is actually processed<br />

and stored.<br />

I Glossary<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver<br />

The software which changes data created<br />

by the application program into data which<br />

can be interpreted by the printer.<br />

Mode Menu<br />

The menu for setting fixed conditions for<br />

processing each of the emulation modes of<br />

PCL emulation mode, HP-GL emulation<br />

mode, HP-GL/2 emulation mode.<br />

8K<br />

267 x 388 mm paper. Also called Hakkai.<br />

Appendix<br />

259


Appendix<br />

260<br />

J<br />

Q & A<br />

This section describes the frequently asked questions and their answers.<br />

Refer to them when using this machine.<br />

I wish to check the printer settings<br />

You can check the current printer settings by referring to the System Settings<br />

List.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Settings List.<br />

I wish to know the available printing features<br />

For the PCL printer driver of this machine, the printing features include N Up, 2<br />

Sided, Poster, Booklet Creation.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on each of these features.<br />

I wish to change the paper size of paper tray<br />

When you wish to temporarily use paper sizes other than those loaded in trays 1<br />

– 4, it is convenient to use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) for loading.<br />

You can change the paper sizes in trays 1 – 4.<br />

“3.2 About Paper” (P. 37) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to load paper in tray 5 (Bypass<br />

Tray) and change paper sizes of trays 1 – 4.<br />

I wish to print in black and white<br />

Black and white documents will be automatically detected and printed in black<br />

and white. To print color documents in black and white, select Black for Output<br />

Color on the printer properties dialog box.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing in black and white.<br />

I wish to print with special paper<br />

By using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), you can print with special papers like heavyweight,<br />

transparency, lightweight. Special papers cannot be printed from trays 1<br />

– 4.<br />

“4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size” (P. 66) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on printing with special<br />

papers.


I wish to print with the same image quality of the document<br />

J Q & A<br />

You can configure settings to match the document type (photo, text, presentation,<br />

web page etc.) and fine tune the colors.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing the same image quality as the document.<br />

I wish to install the printer driver in multiple clients<br />

To install the printer driver with similar settings (e.g. printing features, port) to<br />

multiple clients, it will be convenient to use the setup disk creation tool.<br />

“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to<br />

install the printer driver.<br />

Print request has been sent but printing is not carried out<br />

Print out the Job History Report or Error History Report and then check the print<br />

job which you sent.<br />

“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on checking the<br />

print jobs sent.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the Job<br />

History Report and Error History Report.<br />

I wish to upgrade my OS for use with this machine<br />

There are printer drivers for each specific OS. Use the printer driver for your new<br />

OS for installation.<br />

“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to<br />

install the printer driver.<br />

I wish to check whether the print job of my print request has been<br />

output<br />

By using the printer monitor of CentreWare Network Services which is included<br />

in the CD-ROM, you can check the status of print jobs on your computer. Also,<br />

you can use CentreWare Internet Services to delete print jobs from your computer.<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services and printer monitor.<br />

Appendix<br />

261


Appendix<br />

262<br />

J Q & A<br />

I wish to check the number of sheets copied/printed<br />

You can check the number of sheets copied or printed using the control panel<br />

display. By printing out the Meter Report and <strong>Printer</strong> Meter Report, you can also<br />

check the number of sheets copied or printed according to client (job owner).<br />

“6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on checking the number of sheets copied or printed.


Index<br />

Numerics<br />

100Base-TX.......................................................... 11<br />

10Base-T............................................................... 11<br />

A<br />

Auto tray switch.................................................... 38<br />

B<br />

Basic printing process......................................... 49<br />

BOOTP .................................................................. 13<br />

Border erase....................................................... 180<br />

C<br />

Cancel print jobs .................................................. 59<br />

Cancel printing .............................................. 57, 58<br />

Cancel scanning ....................................... 156, 157<br />

Canceling jobs in waiting/process..................... 58<br />

CentreWare Internet Services ......................... 106<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services ...................... 119<br />

Changing mailbox viewer settings .................. 212<br />

Check password ................................................ 127<br />

Checking job status ............................................. 60<br />

Checking scanned data in mailbox ................. 203<br />

Checking scanned data on computer............. 206<br />

Checking status of job in process of<br />

scanning .............................................................. 158<br />

Configuring machine (scan) ............................. 133<br />

Configuring scan settings ................................. 160<br />

Connecting by parallel interface ........................ 10<br />

Connecting by Token Ring interface ................ 11<br />

Contrast............................................................... 185<br />

Creating mailbox ................................................ 127<br />

Customizing non-standard paper size.............. 66<br />

D<br />

Delete/save document ...................................... 127<br />

Deleting scanned data in mailbox .................. 203<br />

Deleting scanned data on computer .............. 206<br />

DHCP .................................................................... 13<br />

Document weight .............................................. 144<br />

E<br />

Ethernet interface................................................ 11<br />

EtherTalk (option)................................................... 8<br />

Expanding print areas for printing .................... 89<br />

Extension tray ...................................................... 42<br />

F<br />

Flow of printing .................................................... 36<br />

Flow of setting (scan) ....................................... 120<br />

G<br />

Gradation adjustment ....................................... 257<br />

H<br />

How to display scanner name......................... 208<br />

How to import scanned data ........................... 210<br />

How to scan ....................................................... 154<br />

I<br />

Image compression .......................................... 189<br />

Import scanned data to computer................... 194<br />

Interface board (Token Ring) .......................... 235<br />

Interface cable ..................................................... 10<br />

Internal fonts ...................................................... 234<br />

Internet printing................................................ 7, 30<br />

Internet services ................................................ 112<br />

IPP......................................................................... 30<br />

J<br />

Job template .............................................. 119, 216<br />

Job template list ................................................ 218<br />

Jobs and maintenance screens...................... 114<br />

Index<br />

263


Index<br />

264<br />

JPEG file format ................................................ 154<br />

L<br />

Lighter/Darker .................................................... 185<br />

Loading capacity................................................ 144<br />

Loading documents........................................... 147<br />

Loading in DADF ............................................... 148<br />

Loading on document glass............................. 147<br />

Local printer............................................................ 4<br />

M<br />

Mailbox data....................................................... 194<br />

Mailbox name..................................................... 127<br />

Mailbox password.............................................. 127<br />

Memory allocation ............................................... 22<br />

Mixed size originals........................................... 168<br />

Moving paper guide ............................................ 44<br />

N<br />

NetWare............................................................ 7, 32<br />

Network printer ...................................................... 5<br />

Network scanner utility ..................................... 208<br />

Non-spool mode .................................................. 24<br />

O<br />

On-line help .......................................................... 49<br />

Original orientation ................................... 149, 166<br />

Outline fonts ....................................................... 234<br />

Output color (scan)............................................ 160<br />

Output side ........................................................... 39<br />

P<br />

Paper..................................................................... 37<br />

Paper guide .......................................................... 42<br />

Parallel interface.................................................. 10<br />

PCL memory ........................................................ 23<br />

Port for scanning ............................................... 122<br />

PostScript memory .............................................. 23<br />

Precautions/Limitations .................................... 237<br />

Print area .............................................................. 89<br />

Print page buffer .................................................. 22<br />

Printable area..................................................... 233<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver : installing ...................................... 50<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> environments............................................. 4<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> type ......................................................... 232<br />

Printing features................................................... 46<br />

Printing non-standard paper size ...................... 66<br />

Printing procedure ............................................... 46<br />

Printing secure print jobs.................................... 72<br />

Printing special papers ....................................... 64<br />

Printing speed .................................................... 232<br />

Printing system .................................................. 232<br />

R<br />

Receive buffer ...................................................... 23<br />

Reduce/Enlarge ................................................. 174<br />

Resolution........................................................... 232<br />

S<br />

Salutation ............................................................ 122<br />

Sample Print......................................................... 83<br />

Sample print ......................................................... 77<br />

Save in server .................................................... 216<br />

Scan area............................................................ 144<br />

Scan size ............................................................ 171<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> driver.................................................... 208<br />

Secure print .......................................................... 70<br />

Setting IP address ........................................ 13, 14<br />

Setting port ........................................................... 18<br />

Setting printer environments................................ 3<br />

Setting scanner environment........................... 117<br />

Setting secure print ............................................. 70<br />

Setting spool......................................................... 23<br />

SMB ....................................................................... 26<br />

Spool mode .......................................................... 23<br />

STP ............................................................... 11, 235


Stroke fonts......................................................... 234<br />

Suitable document sizes................................... 144<br />

Suitable paper size ............................................ 144<br />

Switching printer off-line ..................................... 56<br />

T<br />

Target OS (scan) ............................................... 121<br />

TCP/IP (LPD).................................................... 6, 28<br />

TIFF file format................................................... 154<br />

Token Ring (option)............................................... 9<br />

Token Ring interface ........................................... 11<br />

U<br />

Using mailbox..................................................... 122<br />

Using scanning feature ..................................... 122<br />

UTP ............................................................... 11, 235<br />

W<br />

Warm-up time..................................................... 232<br />

Windows network (SMB) ...................................... 5<br />

Index<br />

265


Customer Response Sheet<br />

DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) (DE3043E2-1)<br />

To improve our publications, we would appreciate your feedback regarding this guide. Please take a<br />

few moments to complete and return this form to us.<br />

● About Yourself<br />

1. How often do you use this guide?<br />

[ ] Daily [ ] Weekly [ ] Monthly [ ] Infrequently<br />

2. When do you usually refer to the guide?<br />

[ ] Doing a usual operation [ ] Using unfamiliar features<br />

[ ] Solving a problem<br />

3. Which part of the guide do you read frequently?<br />

Chapter/Section/Page:<br />

4. Where do you keep this guide?<br />

5. (Optional)<br />

Your Name: Occupation:<br />

Company or organization:<br />

Address:<br />

● About the <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Strongly Neutral Strongly<br />

agree<br />

disagree<br />

1. It is handy. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

2. It is easy to read. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

3. Titles of chapters and sections make sense. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

4. Information is logically placed. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

5. Referencing is easy. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

6. Content is easy to understand. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

7. The step-by-step instructions are easy to follow. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

8. All necessary information is included. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

9. Illustrations aid in the understanding of content. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

10. The use of color is effective. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

Other comments:<br />

After completing this form, detach and send it to the address below.<br />

(Please use your own envelope and postage stamp.)<br />

Thank you for your cooperation.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.<br />

KSP R&D 2D7<br />

3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku<br />

Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken<br />

JAPAN 213-0012.<br />


DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>)<br />

Human Interface Design Development<br />

Document Products & Supply Company<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.<br />

DE3043E2-1 (Edition 2)<br />

July 2003<br />

Copyright © 2003 by <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!